Home

Basler ace USB 3.0 User`s Manual

1. RM s A Direct coupled GPIO Fig 39 Direct coupled GPIO Line Schematic with the GPIO Line Set as an Input and with a Typical External Circuit Illustration for Pin 1 as an Example Simplified For more information about GPIO pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 5 2 1 on page 52 For more information about setting the GPIO line operation see Section 5 11 on page 76 and Section 5 12 on page 80 66 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 9 3 Operation as an Output This section describes the electrical operation of the GPIO line when the line has been set to operate as an output 5 9 3 1 Electrical Characteristics NOTICE Voltage outside of the safe operating voltage range can cause damage You must supply power within the safe operating voltage range camera will be reached even under less than favorable conditions e g for long cable lengths harsh EMI environment etc we recommend to generally use an external pull up resistor or to connect a high side load To ensure that the specified voltage levels for signals transmitted out of the Voltages The following I O supply voltage requirements apply to a direct coupled GPIO line when it is set as an output and when it is in the off state Voltage Significance 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum The absolute maximum must never be exceeded Otherwise the camera can be damaged and the w
2. 289 293 status see acquisition status 98 101 103 111 see line status stress tests see mechanical stress tests 33 synchronous trigger source 220 T temporal performance determining factors 73 Of IO els iu ies esa ctt std di 69 teSt images de acere 280 thread length see lens thread length tightening sequence M2 screws sesssssssseee 31 M3 screws iei naei aiig 32 timer delays iita he net nettes 88 o 8 iz iiTo o ctevtes set ecpeeseeetodeetivenchctaheered 88 source signal for output line 88 transition threshold 58 65 transmission start delay 162 trigger activation falling edge 104 rising edge scettr eter 104 trigger source eeeeeeeeeeeenee 218 asynchronous 221 cdm 104 SOWIE eia ee eadar a erees 104 software signal 104 synchronous eeeeeeeeenee 220 trigger width exposure mode 122 U USB 3 0 powered hub LPS eb tais eti reds 37 41 55 zm UE DS 37 41 55 USB3 Micro B port seeen 53 user defined values 287 user outplt ette 80 84 USer Set cene eres 288 auto functions factory setup 289 default for startup 289 explain
3. 256 R8 d MENTEM REESE emir Te 256 LUT enable parameter 258 LUT index parameter 258 M max height parameter 284 max width parameter 284 maximum allowed frame rate 165 mechanical stress tests 33 minimum ouput pulse width see line minimum output pulse width mirror image eeeeeeeee 252 254 missing codes seseeeeeee 202 modes of operation of auto functions 262 mono pixel format ssssss 180 mounting point sassen 26 mounting screw hole 26 31 32 mounting the camera ssss 31 N non sequencer parameter camera parameter 215 sequencer set related parameter 215 O OESE E A EA E EE 207 ONSELY cite eH 207 optical format see optical size seses neeese rererere 2 optical size 2 output line direct coupled voltage requirements 67 313 Index output line opto isolated voltage requirements 60 ovehead see exposure overhead 132 P parameter limits removing 200 Datbi oe nette ei ie 217 physical sensor sser 247 pin assignments eesessesseee 52 pin numbering esee 52 pixel d
4. Trigger source event occurs Fig 46 Timer Signal The following trigger source events are available All cameras except acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 cameras Exposure Start is currently the only trigger source event available to start Timer 1 acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 cameras only Flash Window Start is currently the only trigger source event available to start Timer 1 If you require the timer signal to be high when the timer is triggered and to go low when the delay expires simply set the output line to invert Timer 1 Active can serve as the source signal for output line Line 2 and for the GPIO lines Line 3 and Line 4 if configured for output For information about selecting the Timer 1 Active as the source signal for an output line see Section 5 12 1 on page 80 5 12 6 1 Setting the Timer Trigger Source To set the timer trigger source for Timer 1 1 Use the Timer Selector to select Timer 1 2 Set the value of the Timer Trigger Source parameter to Exposure Start This will set the selected timer to use the start of exposure to start timer 1 88 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface cameras For these cameras the Flash Window Start signal is available as the The Exposure Start signal is not available for acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 Timer Trigger Source If the exposure time is too short for the flash window to open see the note in Section 6 6 2 on page 132 timer 1 will start noneth
5. Time Fig 65 Non overlapped Acquisition Ez Line Exposure I Line Readout In the overlapped mode of operation the acquisition for a new frame begins while the camera is still completing the acquisition process for the previous frame This situation is illustrated in Figure 66 Basler ace USB 3 0 145 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 ExFSTrig l Signal Frame Acquisition N Frame Acquisition N 1 Frame Acquisition N 2 TF BP Time Fig 66 Overlapped Exposure and Sensor Readout Line Exposure 1 Line Readout Determining whether your camera is operating with overlapped or with non overlapped acquisition is not a matter of issuing a command or switching a setting on or off Rather the way that you operate the camera will determine whether the frame acquisitions are overlapped or not If we define the frame period as the time from the start of exposure for line one in the frame N acquisition to the start of exposure for line one in frame N 1 acquisition then Exposure will not overlap when Frame Period gt Exposure Time Parameter Setting Total Sensor Readout Time Exposure will overlap when Frame Period lt Exposure Time Parameter Setting Total Sensor Readout Time You can determine the total sensor readout time for a frame by reading the value of the Sensor Readout Time parameter This parameter indicates the time in microseconds from the beginning of readout for line one to
6. ea oa Exp Overlap Time Max Setting of frame readout and on the current Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter setting Frame Acquisition N 1 Exposure Sensor Readout e r Exp Overlap Time Max Setting Frame Acquisition N 2 Exposure Sensor Readout 9 Time Camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger status Fig 74 Frame Trigger Wait Signal with the Trigger Width Exposure Mode If you are operating the camera in the trigger width exposure mode you can avoid overtriggering the camera by always doing the following Setting the camera s Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter so that it represents the smallest exposure time you intend to use Making sure that your exposure time is always equal to or greater than the setting for the Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter Monitoring the camera s Frame Trigger Wait signal and only using the ExFSTrig signal to start exposure when the Frame Trigger Wait signal is high You should set the Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter value to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure mode and that you intend to use the ExFSTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us In this case you would set the camera s Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter to 3000 us 158 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition
7. Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Apply a rising edge of th xternally generated electrical signal ExFBTrig signal to input line Line 1 on the camera Perform the required functions to parameterize the frame start trigger to trigger 5 frame starts and to retrieve 5 frames here camera AcquisitionStop Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 110 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 4 The Frame Start Trigger The frame start trigger is used to begin frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status it will begin a frame acquisition each time it receives a frame start trigger signal Note that in order for the camera to be in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The Acquisition Mode parameter must be set correctly A proper Acquisition Start command must be applied to the camera A proper frame burst start trigger signal must be applied to the camera if the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on For more information about the Acquisition Mode parameter and about Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands see Sec
8. Auto Function ROI Image ROI Ei BREESE um n Imr Oo I l immar 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Auto Function ROI s BEE EEE nm a E p Image ROI ie Fig 107 Various Degrees of Overlap Between the Auto Function ROI and the Image ROI 266 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 12 3 3 Setting an Auto Function ROI Setting an Auto Function ROI is a two step process You must first select the Auto Function ROI related to the auto function that you want to use and then set the size and the position of the Auto Function AOI By default an Auto Function ROI is set to the full resolution of the camera s sensor You can change the size and the position of an Auto Function ROI by changing the value of the Auto Function ROIs
9. ge oO 2 B E 2 EIT 2 8 E Q O IR Cut Filter color cameras only Thread 9 6 Max 10 8 Max Fig 25 Maximum Lens Thread Length Dimensions in mm for Cameras with the C mount Filter Holder mono and color cameras Fig 26 Maximum Lens Thread Length Dimensions in mm for Cameras with the CS mount 30 CS mount Lens CS mount Thread EY A Es e N Q IR Cut Filter color cameras only Thread 4 6 Max 5 8 Max AW00123404000 11 9 6 Unthreaded 4 Not to Scale 6 Unthreaded w Not to Scale Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 Mounting Instructions To ensure optimum alignment of the camera when mounting the camera in your system you must follow a certain tightening sequence when tightening screws Depending on whether you use M2 or M3 screws a different tightening sequence applies with C mounts However the tightening sequences apply equally to cameras with The tightening sequences are illustrated in Figure 27 and Figure 28 for cameras CS mounts 1 5 1 Tightening Sequence Wh
10. Not to Scale Fig 24 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras with the CS mount Note acA1920 20gm gc cameras are not available with CS mount 28 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 4 2 Maximum Allowed Lens Thread Length All cameras mono and color with C mount and CS mount are normally equipped with a plastic filter holder The length of the threads on any lens you use with the cameras depends on the lens mount Camera with C mount see Figure 25 The thread length can be a maximum of 9 6 mm and the lens can intrude into the camera body a maximum of 10 8 mm Camera with CS mount see Figure 26 The thread length can be a maximum of 4 6 mm and the lens can intrude into the camera body a maximum of 5 8 mm NOTICE If either of the above limits is exceeded the lens mount or the filter holder will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate properly Note that on color cameras the filter holder will be populated with an IR cut filter On monochrome cameras the filter holder will be present but will not be populated with an IR cut filter You can obtain lenses with correct thread lengths from Basler see www baslerweb com Basler ace USB 3 0 29 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Filter Holder mono and color cameras C mount Lens
11. sssseseele res 165 6 10 1 Using Basler pylon to Check the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate 166 6 10 2 Increasing the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate 005 167 6 11 Use Case Descriptions and Diagrams 0 cee ee 168 Color Creation and Enhancement 0000ee scene eee eee 177 7 QolorGreation x reee kes te E aE a ERE M PLVELA eee ee ed 177 7 1 4 Bayer Color Filter Alignment lille 178 7 1 2 Pixel Formats Available on Color Cameras 000 00 ee ee eee 179 7 2 Integrated IR Cut Filter 0 2 tees 181 7 3 Color Enhancement Features 182 1 321 Balance White ssl Uae Sedans Ly ae Bo ee eel A ne eins 182 7 3 2 Light Source Presets 0 0 0 eE o a ees 184 7 3 8 Color Adjustment All Color Cameras Except acA2000 165 and ACAZ040 90 i sie ee er Doe if SOA A Ee na MA 186 7 3 4 Color Transformation llle 191 7 3 5 A Procedure for Setting the Color Enhancements 193 iple 195 Bil Galli ss err It EET CL TPewIUE Eia wetupelttaes ved e ets as 195 8 1 4 Setting the Gain icio eme eee eo ae bie debe 196 8 2 Black Levelt sedo Pie nee thee oe E eee eee LA ee eee dees 198 8 2 1 Setting the Black Level 0 0 eee ee 198 a Remove Parameter LIMNS esed ideas vedete Ex acis eet 200 9S4 Digital SIE s Sees ues i cates AEE Ae eu ede I a e 201 8 4 4 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats 0 0 00 eee eee 201 8 4 2 Digital Shift
12. Set the acquisition burst frame count camera AcquisitionBurstFrameCount SetValue 5 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 106 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 3 4 Using a Software Frame Burst Start Trigger 6 3 4 1 Introduction If the camera s Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Frame Burst Start Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software frame burst start trigger signal to the camera before you can begin frame acquisition A software frame burst start trigger signal is applied by Setting the Trigger Selector parameter to Acquisition Start Executing a Trigger Software command The camera will initially be in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status It cannot react to frame trigger signals when in this acquisition status When a software frame burst start trigger signal is received by the camera it will exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the number of frame start trigger signals received by the camera is equal to the current Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter setting the camera will return to the waiting for frame burst
13. esessse 202 E effective image ROI sss 247 effective sensor diagonal 2 electromagnetic interference 35 electrostatic discharge 35 EMI deed oues ctu aede 35 64 67 ERS mode eee eee 132 see electronic rolling shutter ES utto tetti 35 event exposure end seeeesss 277 frame burst start over trigger 277 frame burst start trigger 277 frame start overtrigger 277 frame start trigger 277 event notification eessssss 277 exposure ExFSTrig controlled 122 exposure time offset 122 exposure auto 0 eee 271 exposure end event seere 277 312 AW00123404000 exposure modes trigger width 122 exposure overhead e 132 exposure overlap time max 124 144 exposure start delay 162 exposure time eeseeeesss 298 exposure time chunk 298 F factory setup 289 290 auto functions factory setup 289 high gain factory setup 289 standard factory setup 289 filter alignment see color filter alignment filter holder ss 29 181 flash window in
14. lille 87 5 12 6 Working With the Timer Output Signal llle 88 5 12 6 1 Setting the Timer Trigger Source slsseseeesssns 88 5 12 6 2 Setting the Timer Delay Time 0 00 eee eee 89 5 12 6 3 Setting the Timer Duration Time llli 90 Significance of I O Line StatuS 0 20 eene 90 5 13 1 Line Status for Input Lines l l 90 5 13 2 Line Status for Output Lines 0 0 eee 92 Checking I O Line Status 00 tenes 94 5 14 1 Checking the Status of All JD Lines liliis 94 5 14 2 Checking the Status of an Individual I O Line 95 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Table of Contents 6 Image Acquisition Control 2000 eee eee 97 6 1 OVEINVIOW nix is e Pe cR UG REX EUNEX S eee eee ee E XU RAE REGERE E eee 97 6 2 Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode 101 6 3 The Frame Burst Start Trigger liliis 103 6 3 1 Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode 0 cee ee 103 6 3 1 1 Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode Off 103 6 3 1 2 Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode On 0 4 103 6 3 2 Acquisition Burst Frame Count 0 0 0 0 eee 105 6 3 3 Setting the Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters 106 6 3 4 Using a Software Frame Burst Start Trigger 0 00 ee eee 107 6 3 4 4 Introduction aee eaea a a e a les 107 6 3 4 2 Setti
15. 2 Once a line is properly set make sure that you only apply electrical signals to the line that are appropriate for the line s current setting Direct coupled GPIO lines have the advantage of working with very short delays compared to opto isolated I O lines The direct coupled GPIO lines are however distinctly more susceptible to electromagnetic interference We therefore strongly recommend to only use the direct coupled GPIO lines when significant electromagnetic interference will not occur 64 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 9 2 Operation as an Input This section describes the electrical operation of a GPIO line when the line has been set to operate as an input 5 9 2 1 Electrical Characteristics Voltage outside of the safe operating voltage range can cause damage You must supply power within the safe operating voltage range The following I O supply voltage requirements apply to a direct coupled GPIO line when the line is set as an input Voltage Significance 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum The absolute maximum must never be exceeded Otherwise the camera can be damaged and the warranty becomes void 0 to 5 0 VDC Safe operating input voltage range the minimum external pull up voltage is 3 3 VDC as illustrated in Figure 39 0 to 0 8 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0 inverter disabled voltage level low of Section 5 13 on page 90
16. Mono Color Mono or color color models include a Bayer pattern RGB filter on the sensor Data Output Type USB 3 0 nominal max 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed Pixel Formats Mono Models Mono 8 Mono 12p Mono 12 Color Models Mono 8 RGB 8 Bayer BG 8 BGR 8 Bayer BG 12 YCbCr422 8 Bayer BG 12p ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal via the USB 3 0 port or free run Exposure Control Via external trigger signal or programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements Nominal 5 VDC SELV and LPS compliant and in accord with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification supplied via the camera s USB 3 0 port 2 5 W typical amp 3 0 W max 3 5 W typical and max 5 VDC 5 VDC I O Lines 1 opto isolated input line 1 opto isolated output line and 2 direct coupled GPIO lines power supplies must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Lens Mount C mount CS mount Size L x W x H 29 3 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm without cylindric housing extension or connectors 48 2 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm with cylindric housing extension and connectors Weight lt 80g Conformity CE UL FCC GenlCam V 2 x including PFNC V 1 x and SFNC V 2 x IP30 RoHS USB3 Vision USB IF in preparation The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Table 3 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 Specifications Requirements and Preca
17. camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector UserSet1 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer to easily set the selector For more information about the Basler pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 290 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 17 2 Saving a User Set After having set parameter values as desired you can save them for further use into User Set 1 User Set 2 or User Set 3 Saving the parameter values also means saving them from the current active set into a user set in the camera s non volatile memory To save a User Set from the active set into the non volatile memory using Basler pylon 1 Make changes to the camera s settings until the camera is operating in a manner that you would like to save 2 Set the User Set Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 or User Set 3 3 Execute a User Set Save command to save the active set to the selected user set Saving an active set to a user set in the camera s non volatile memory will overwrite any parameters that were previously saved in that user set camera is idle i e when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have Saving a user set into the non volatile memory active set is only allowed when the a single image acquisition pending You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Save command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following c
18. sssssssses 183 manual adjustment 183 balance white auto 275 Bayer filter zieat 2o nes 177 Bayer pixel format 179 DINNING Ses eS AA A ee 243 color cameras eseese rererere 245 horizontal 243 245 image distortion 244 246 248 Basler ace USB 3 0 Index image ROI settings 247 248 mono Cameras essiri nininini 243 reduced resolution 247 response to light 247 verica zn tus 243 245 black level esses 198 C cable UO uoce SL seers CAM 54 USB 9 uitae ict niet tale 54 camera models seseeeee 1 camera mounting eeeeeeeee 31 camera parameter ssssssss 215 camera pOWer seeeeee 55 Center X ose eue edet ie boites 213 CODler Y aiuunisceei eee 213 centering see ROI centering chunk exposure time esses 298 Ein italia iets 297 line status all sssss 297 chunk mode active sssse 295 GO mounbsz iie eee t te e eee 26 27 color additive mixing sse 187 prifiaryz acier rere 186 secondary seen 186 color adjustment sessss 186 color creation seeeessss
19. llle 44 3 1 3 The pylon SDK scel acne ee bb See E RE wel 45 4 Camera Functional Description 0 0 cece eee 47 4 1 Overview acA640 90 acA640 120 acA645 100 acA1300 30 acA1600 20 47 4 2 Overview acA1920 25 acA1920 155 acA2000 165 acA2040 90 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 nnua dux XR ERR RESTE wu Ru E bee eee delet 49 5 Physical INtetace s eisvus ER DE X Lo oer dae EE PEL We ee ada 51 5 1 General Description of the Camera Connections 00 0c eee eee 51 5 2 Camera Connector Pin Numbering and Assignments 0020 ee eee 52 5 2 1 6 pin Connector Pin Numbering and Assignments 0 5 52 5 2 2 USB3 0 Micro B Port Pin Numbering and Assignments 53 5 3 Camera Connector TypeS 0 ccc teens 53 5 3 1 6 pin Connector 1 0 0 tees 53 5 3 2 USB3 0 Micro B Port ne 53 54 LED Indicator icine baa Meh hed hee Sells RU ne RR ae Woe Seale ee 53 Basler ace USB 3 0 Table of Contents AW00123404000 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 Camera Cabling Requirements llle 54 5 541 USB3 0 Cable is sh oe oN A ae EG ba DOSE RS 54 55 27 VO Cablen neia o doe br ties Te m igre TAN Im BK 54 Camera POWEr orale 34 gasean be eee See Ue Le OSs atid nse Sasa Mees 55 Opto isolated Input Pin 2 Line 1 0 060 eee 57 5 7 1 Electrical Characteristics liliis 57 Opto isolated Output
20. Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when frame burst start triggering is on camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the frame burst start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameBurstStart Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set the acquisition burst frame count camera AcquisitionBurstFrameCount SetValue 5 The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode to on the Trigger Source to Line 1 the Trigger Activation to rising edge and the Acquisition Burst Frame Count to 5 Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when frame burst start triggering is on camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the frame burst start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameBurstStart Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the activation mode for the selected trigger to rising edge camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge
21. Using a wrong pin assignment can severely damage the camera Make sure the cable and plug you connect to the 6 pin I O connector follow the correct pin assignment NOTICE An incorrect plug can damage the 6 pin connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 6 pin I O connector must have 6 female pins Using a plug designed for a smaller or a larger number of pins can damage the connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s USB 3 0 Micro B port must be designed for use with the USB 3 0 Micro B port Trying to use any other type of plug can destroy the port 38 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Warranty Precautions To ensure that your warranty remains in force Do not remove the camera s serial number label If the label is removed and the serial number can t be read from the camera s registers the warranty is void Do not open the camera housing Do not open the housing Touching internal components may damage them Keep foreign matter outside of the camera Be careful not to allow liquid flammable or metallic material inside of the camera housing If operated with any foreign matter inside the camera may fail or cause a fire For the special case of cleaning the camera s sensor see the instructions below Avoid electromagnetic fields Do not operate the camera in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields Avoid elec
22. acA4600 10uc Sensor Size um 3840 x 2748 uc 4608 x 3288 H x V pixels uc 3840 x 2748 Sensor Type Aptina MT9J003 Aptina MT9F002 Progressive scan CMOS Progressive scan CMOS Rolling shutter Rolling shutter Optical Size 1 2 3 Effective Sensor Diagonal 7 9 mm 8 0 mm Pixel Size H x V 1 67 um x 1 67 um 1 4 um x 1 4 um Max Frame Rate 14 fps at full resolution 10 fps at full resolution Mono Color Mono or color color models include a Color includes a Bayer pattern RGB Bayer pattern RGB filter on the sensor filter on the sensor Data Output Type USB 3 0 nominal max 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed Pixel Formats Mono Model Mono 8 Color Model Mono 8 Mono 12 Bayer BG 8 Mono 12p Bayer BG 12 Bayer BG 12p Color Model Mono 8 YCbCr422 8 Bayer BG 8 Bayer BG 12 Bayer BG 12p YCbCr422 8 ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal via the USB 3 0 port or free run Exposure Control Via external trigger signal or programmab le via the camera API Camera Power Requirements Nominal 5 VDC SELV and LPS complia Bus 3 0 specification supplied via the camera s USB 3 0 port nt and in accord with the Universal Serial 2 5 W typical amp 2 8 W max 5 VDC I O Lines 1 opto isolated input line 1 opto isolated output line 2 direct coupled GPIO lines power supplies must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Lens Mount C mount CS mount Size
23. camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector_CounterValue camera ChunkEnable SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Number Ranges Be aware that the counter value initially starts at 1 Whenever the counter restarts after having reached 4294967295 it will however start another counting cycle at 0 300 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Counter Reset Whenever the camera is powered off the counter will reset to 0 During operation you can reset the counter via the I O IN line Line 1 one of the GPIO lines Line 3 Line 4 if configured for input or via software You can also disable the ability to perform a reset by setting the counter reset source to off By default the counter reset source is set to off To use the counter reset feature Set the counter reset source to Line1 Line 3 Line 4 Software or Off Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source You can set the counter reset parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the frame counter reset and to execute a reset via software Select counter 1 and assign Frame Start as event source camera CounterSelector SetValue CounterSelector Counterl camer
24. ExposureTime AcquisitionFrameRate AcquisitionFrameRateEnable TimerDelay for Timer 1 TimerDuration for Timer 1 CounterEventSource CounterResetSource CounterDuration for Counter 2 Gain BlackLevel DigitalShift OffsetX OffsetY Width Height CenterX CenterY ReverseX ReverseY 1 BinningHorizontal BinningVertical LUTEnable BalanceRatio ColorAdjustmentHue 2 3 ColorAdjustmentSaturation 2 9 ColorTransformationValue 2 ChunkModeActive ChunkEnable TestlmageSelector 1 Parameter is only available for acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 cameras Parameter is only available for color cameras 3 Parameter is not available for acA2000 165uc and acA2040 90uc cameras 216 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 6 2 2 Sequencer Set Related Parameters and Sequencer Set Advance Sequencer Set Related Parameters To each sequencer set the parameter values for the following sequencer set related parameters apply SequencerSetStart CounterEventSource SequencerSetSelector CounterResetSource SequencerSetPath CounterDuration for Counter 2 SequencerSetNext SequencerTriggerSource SequencerTriggerActivation The Sequencer Set Start parameter defines the first sequencer set that will be loaded into the active set after the following two actions have occurred the sequencer mode was set to On and the first frame start trigger was issued For all Basler USB 3 0 ace cameras the Sequencer Set Start parameter val
25. Line N 1 Line N Flash Window Width Fig 60 Flash Window for Rolling Shutter in the ERS Mode E EL UE rz ea EL pu u Line 7 guum EEUU c SSS ESS L E epa d line exposure time W line readout time For more information about the Exposure Time parameter see Section 6 5 on page 127 Basler ace USB 3 0 139 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Flash Window in Global Reset Release Operating mode If you are using the global reset release mode you should use flash exposure for capturing images of both stationary and moving objects If you don t use flash exposure when capturing images of stationary objects the brightness in each acquired image will vary significantly from top to bottom due to the differences in the exposure times of the lines If you don t use flash exposure when capturing images of moving objects the brightness in each acquired image will vary significantly from top to bottom due to the differences in the exposure times of the lines and the images will be distorted due to the temporal shift between the end of exposure for each line You can avoid these problems by using flash lighting and by applying the flash during the flash window for each frame The flash window is the period of time during a frame acquisition when all of the lines in the sensor are open for exposure Figure 61 illustrates the flash window
26. Pin 3 Line 4 5 9 1 Introduction The camera has two direct coupled GPIO lines that are accessed via pins 1 and 3 of the 6 pin connector on the back of the camera see Figure 34 The GPIO lines can be set to operate as inputs to the camera or to operate as camera outputs The GPIO lines are designated as Line 3 and Line 4 see also Section 5 2 1 on page 52 The direct coupled GPIO lines are compatible with TTL signals The next sections describe the differences in the GPIO electrical functionality when the lines are set to operate as inputs and when they are set to operate as outputs Electric Shock Hazard Risk of Burn or Death The power supply used must meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and Limited Power Source LPS requirements A suitable power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order a power supply Fire Hazard Risk of Burn The power supply used must meet the Limited Power Source LPS requirements A suitable power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order a power supply Basler ace USB 3 0 63 Physical Interface AW00123404000 NOTICE Applying incorrect electrical signals to the camera s GPIO lines can severely damage the camera 1 Before you connect any external circuitry to a GPIO line we strongly recommend that you set a GPIO line to operate as an input or as an output according to your needs
27. Pin 4 Line 2 llli 60 5 8 1 Electrical Characteristics llli 60 Direct coupled General Purpose I O GPIO Pin 1 Line 3 Pin 3 Line 4 63 5 9 1 Introd ctiOn neu eC Reduce ee eh Vau careers 63 5 9 2 Operationas an Input 20 res 65 5 9 2 1 Electrical Characteristics llli 65 5 9 3 Operation as an Output 2 0 ee eee 67 5 9 3 1 Electrical Characteristics llli 67 Temporal Performance of I O Lines silii 69 5 10 1 Iritrod ction uei et oe ee Reb axe ru TREO EO P erase i Rd 69 5 10 2 Factors Determining I O Temporal Performance 5 73 5 10 3 Measured Propagation Delays 00 0c eee ee 74 5 10 4 Recommendations for Using Camera I Os nananana aaa 75 Configuring Input Lines and Signals 1 2 2 0 llli 76 5 11 1 Selecting an Input Line as the Source Signal for a Camera Function 76 5 11 2 Input Line Debouncers 0 0 0 ere 77 STT Input Lirie Inverter 2o neea e EHE ERE REPULRICRnGeeHR Y ERO 79 Configuring Output Lines and Signals 2 00 0c eee eee 80 5 12 1 Selecting a Source Signal for an Output Line 80 5 12 2 Line Minimum Output Pulse Width 0 00 ee 82 5 12 3 Setting the Status of An Individual User Settable Output Line 84 5 12 4 Setting and Checking the Status of All User Settable Output Lines 85 5 12 5 Output Line Inverter
28. S saturation eeessssseees 186 189 saving parameter value sets 291 saving user S S neern 288 secondary color sesessess 186 sensor PNYSICAl ile iles eet 247 Virtual zie eite 247 sensor diagonal see effective sensor diagonal 2 sensor height parameter 284 sensor readout time 162 sensor width parameter 284 sequencer configuration mode 214 sequencer mode sseeeeeeee 214 sequencer parameter 215 sequencer Seto ee 214 index number sseessss 214 olo eerie 225 transitional nret 226 sequencer set related parameter 215 sequencer trigger source 218 asynchronous nsise 221 synchronous eeeeeee 220 sets of parameter values saving 291 shutter mode global 5 sa eio oce s 130 global reset release 135 145 165 rolling es icri ott 132 software licensing esssssss 34 LZ4 du oe edel ol ase Eius 1 software signal esses 104 source signal for inputs tete ete 76 for output ner mite 80 SBOB diee den 185 259 standard factory setup 289 290 292 293 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 startup parameter set 293 startup user set
29. X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters The value of the X Offset parameter determines the starting column for the Auto Function ROI The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting row for the Auto Function ROI The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the Auto Function ROI The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the Auto Function ROI When you are setting an Auto Function ROI you must follow these guidelines The sum of the Offset X setting plus the Width setting must not exceed the width of the camera s sensor For example on the acA1920 25um the sum of the Offset X setting plus the Width setting must not exceed 1920 The sum of the Offset Y setting plus the Height setting must not exceed the height of the camera s sensor For example on the acA1920 25um the sum of the Offset Y setting plus the Height setting must not exceed 1080 The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1 and Height parameters for an Auto Function ROI in increments of 2 to make the Auto Function ROI match the color filter pattern of the sensor For example you should set the X Offset parameter to 0 2 4 6 8 etc D On color cameras we strongly recommend setting the Offset X Offset Y Width Function ROI refer to the physical columns and lines in the sensor But if binning is enabled monochrome cameras only these parameters are set in term
30. column number row number counter MOD 4096 Test Image 4 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test 8 bit The basic appearance of test image 4 is similar to test image 2 the 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient image The difference between test image 4 and test image 2 is this if a camera feature that involves digital processing is enabled test image 4 will show the effects of the feature while test image 2 will not This makes test image 4 useful for checking the effects of digital features such as the luminance lookup table Test Image 5 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test 12 bit The basic appearance of test image 5 is similar to test image 3 the 12 bit moving diagonal gray gradient image The difference between test image 5 and test image 3 is this if a camera feature that involves digital processing is enabled test image 5 will show the effects of the feature while test image 3 will not This makes test image 5 useful for checking the effects of digital features such as the luminance lookup table 282 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Test Image 6 Moving Diagonal Color Gradient The moving diagonal color gradient test image is available on color cameras only and is designed for use when the camera is set for Y CbCr output As shown in Figure 109 test image six consists of diagonal color gradients when a Mono pixel format is selected gray gradients will appear The image moves by one pixel from rig
31. gt 0 8 to 2 0 VDC Region where the transition threshold occurs the logical status is not defined in this region gt 42 0 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1 inverter disabled voltage level high of Section 5 13 on page 90 Table 13 Voltage Requirements for a Direct coupled GPIO Line Set as an Input Your application must be able to accept 2 mA sink current from the direct coupled GPIO input line without exceeding 0 8 VDC the upper limit of the low status The current draw for high level input current is lt 100 pA Figure 38 shows the applicable electrical circuit wnen a GPIO line is set to operate as an input The figure is drawn to specifically apply to pin 1 Line 3 as an example However with the necessary modifications the figure applies equally to pin 3 Line 4 The figure shows as an example the use of a TTL or CMOS logic gate in the external circuit A different example for an external circuit is shown in Figure 39 Basler ace USB 3 0 65 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 g OC 433VDC 8 1 Camera Typical 6 pin Receptacle Logic Gate Ground for Direct coupled GPIO Fig 38 Direct coupled GPIO Line Schematic with the GPIO Line Set as an Input and with a Typical External Circuit Using a Logic Gate Illustration for Pin 1 as an Example Simplified Se LLLI Eee 1 3 3 VDC Camera Typical 3 3 V 5 0 V 6 pin Receptacle Ground for
32. if the Gain Auto function is disabled If the Gain Auto function is enabled the gain All parameter will merely be in a read only state For more information about auto functions in general see Section 8 12 on page 261 For more information about the Gain Auto function see Section 8 12 4 on page 269 The camera s gain is determined by the value of the All parameter The regular parameter value is adjusted on a scale ranging from zero to a maximum value The minimum regular value depends on whether vertical binning is enabled see Table 34 The maximum allowed setting depends on whether the camera is set for a pixel format that yields an effective pixel bit depth of 8 bit per pixel Mono 8 RGB 8 BGR 8 Bayer BG 8 Bayer GB 8 Bayer RG 8 YCbCr422 8 or of 12 bit Mono 12 Mono 12 p Bayer BG 12 Bayer GB 12 Bayer RG 12 Bayer BG 12 p Bayer GB 12 p Bayer RG 12p Table 34 shows the minimum and maximum settable gain for each camera model The values indicate regular settings i e the parameter limits are not removed Camera Model Gain Setting Min Regular Min Regular with Max Allowed Max Allowed Vertical Binning 8 bit depth 12 bit depth Mono Cameras acA640 90 um uc 0 0 db 3 231 db 29 9047 db 7 539 db acA640 120um uc 0 0 db 0 0 db 33 1357 db 17 95 db acA645 100um uc 0 0 db 2 154 db 29 5457 db 7 18 db acA1300 30um uc 0 0 db 3 59 db 19 745 db 3 59 db acA1600 20u
33. or the ADC Six test images are available The Effect of Camera Settings on Test Images When any of the test image is active the camera s analog features such as gain black level and exposure time have no effect on the images transmitted by the camera For test images 1 2 3 and 6 the cameras digital features such as the luminance lookup table will also have no effect on the transmitted images But for test images 4 and 5 the camera s digital features will affect the images transmitted by the camera This makes test images 4 and 5 a good way to check the effect of using a digital feature such as the luminance lookup table Enabling a Test Image The Test Image Selector is used to set the camera to output a test image You can set the value of the Test Image Selector to one of the test images or to test image off You can set the Test Image Selector from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the selector Set for no test image camera TestlImageSelector SetValue TestIiImageSelector Off Set for the first test image camera TestImageSelector SetValue TestImageSelector_Testimagel You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 280 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 14
34. s nominal operating voltage is 5 VDC effective on the camera s connector Basler ace USB 3 0 37 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 NOTICE Avoid dust on the sensor The camera is shipped with a protective plastic cap on the lens mount To avoid collecting dust on the camera s IR cut filter color cameras or sensor mono cameras make sure that you always put the plastic cap in place when there is no lens mounted on the camera To avoid collecting dust on the camera s IR cut filter color cameras or sensor mono cameras make sure to observe the following Always put the plastic cap in place when there is no lens mounted on the camera Make sure that the camera is pointing down every time you remove or replace the plastic cap or a lens Never apply compressed air to the camera This can easily contaminate optical components particularly the sensor NOTICE On all cameras the lens thread length is limited All cameras mono and color are equipped with a plastic filter holder located in the cylindric housing extension The location of the filter holder limits the length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera If a lens with a very long thread length is used the filter holder or the lens mount will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate properly For more specific information about the lens thread length see Section 1 4 2 on page 29
35. terminated with a 6 pin Hirose plug on one end and unterminated on the other Contact your Basler sales representative to order connectors or cables An incorrect plug can damage the 6 pin I O connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 6 pin I O connector must have 6 female pins Using a plug designed for a smaller or a larger number of pins can damage the connector 54 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface D Note that direct coupled GPIO lines have the advantage of working with very short delays compared to opto isolated I O lines Note also that the direct coupled GPIOs are distinctly more susceptible to EMI than the opto isolated I Os Under harsh EMI conditions GPIOs can turn out not to be usable at all Accordingly use of the GPIOs in an environment with elevated risk of EMI calls for taking additional measures like e g using shorter cables 5 6 Camera Power Camera power must be supplied to the camera via the USB 3 0 cable plugged into the camera s USB 3 0 Micro B port Electric Shock Hazard Risk of Burn or Death The power supply used for supplying camera power must meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and Limited Power Source LPS requirements If you use a powered hub as part of the USB 3 0 connection the powered hub must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Fire Hazard Risk of Burn The power supply used for supplying
36. 0 camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue 1294 camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue 964 camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 268 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 12 4 Gain Auto Gain Auto is the automatic counterpart to manually setting the gain All parameter When the gain auto function is operational the camera will automatically adjust the gain All parameter value within set limits until a target average gray value for the pixel data from the related Auto Function ROI is reached The gain auto function can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If the related Auto Function ROI does not overlap the Image ROI see the Auto Function ROI section the pixel data from the Auto Function ROI will not be used to control the gain Instead the current manual setting for the gain All parameter value will control the gain Either Auto Function ROI can be selected to work with the balance white auto function The gain auto function and the exposure auto function can be used at the same time In this case however you must also set the auto function profile feature For more information about setting the gain manually see Section 8 1 on p
37. 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions This chapter lists the camera models covered by the manual It provides the general specifications for those models and the basic requirements for using them This chapter also includes specific precautions that you should keep in mind when using the cameras We strongly recommend that you read and follow the precautions 1 1 Models The current Basler ace USB 3 0 camera models are listed in the top row of the specification tables on the next pages of this manual The camera models are differentiated by their sensor size their maximum frame rate at full resolution and whether the camera s sensor is mono or color Unless otherwise noted the material in this manual applies to all of the camera models listed in the tables Material that only applies to a particular camera model or to a subset of models such as to color cameras only will be so designated Basler ace USB 3 0 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 1 2 General Specifications Specification acA640 90um uc acA640 120um uc at full resolution Sensor Size um 659 x 494 um 659 x 494 H x V pixels uc 658 x 492 Uc 658 x 492 Sensor Type Sony ICX424AL AQ Sony ICX618 ALA AQA Progressive scan CCD Progressive scan CCD Global shutter Global shutter Optical Size 1 3 1 4 Effective Sensor Diagonal 6 1 mm
38. 1 2 3 or 4 digital shift will be set to shift by 1 shift by 2 shift by 3 or shift by 4 respectively You can set the Digital Shift parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Disable digital shift camera DigitalShift SetValue 0 Enable digital shift by 2 camera DigitalShift SetValue 2 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 206 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 5 Image Region of Interest ROI The image region of interest ROI feature lets you specify a portion of the sensor array and after each image is acquired only the pixel information from the specified portion of the array is transmitted out of the camera The region of interest is referenced to the top left corner of the sensor array The top left corner is designated as column 0 and row 0 as shown in Figure 85 The location and size of the region of interest is defined by declaring an offset X coordinate a width an offset Y coordinate and a height For example suppose that you specify the offset X as 10 the width as 16 the offset Y as 6 and the height as 10 The region of the array that is bounded by these settings is shown in Figure 85 The camera will only tr
39. 1 Test Image Descriptions Test Image 1 Fixed Diagonal Gray Gradient 8 bit The 8 bit fixed diagonal gray gradient test image is best suited for use when the camera is set for monochrome 8 bit output The test image consists of fixed diagonal gray gradients ranging from 0 to 255 If the camera is set for 8 bit output and is operating at full resolution test image one will look similar to Figure 108 The mathematical expression for this test image Gray Value column number row number MOD 256 A Fig 108 Test Image One Test Image 2 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient 8 bit The 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 1 but it is not stationary The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition The mathematical expression for this test image is Gray Value column number row number counter MOD 256 Basler ace USB 3 0 281 Features AW00123404000 Test Image 3 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient 12 bit The 12 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 2 but it is a 12 bit pattern The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition The mathematical expression for this test image is Gray Value
40. 1 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 128 Shift by 2 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the output from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 2 from the ADC ADC The result of shifting twice is that the output of the x H n bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit camera is effectively multiplied by 4 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 2 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 64 moz Shifted Twice Shift by 3 When the camera is set to shift by 3 the output from the camera will include bit 8 through bit 1 from the AD ADC g bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting three times is that the output of M 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 the camera is effectively multiplied by 8 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 3 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore that you should only use the shift by 3 set
41. 12 Bit Camera Output 2048 1024 0 0 1024 2048 3072 4095 12 Bit Digitized Sensor Reading Fig 105 Lookup Table with Values Mapped for Higher Camera Output at Low Sensor Readings Basler ace USB 3 0 Features 257 Features AW00123404000 Using the Luminance Lookup Table for Cameras with 12 bit ADC Data and Pixel Format Set for 8 Bit Output As mentioned above when the camera is set for a pixel format where it outputs 12 bits the lookup table is used to perform a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion But the lookup table can also be used in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion To use the table in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion you enter 12 bit values into the table and enable the table as you normally would But instead of setting the camera for a pixel format that results in a camera output with 12 bits effective you set the camera for a pixel format that results in 8 bit output e g Mono 8 In this situation the camera will first use the values in the table to do a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion It will then drop the 4 least significant bits of the converted value and will transmit the 8 most significant bits Changing the Values in the Luminance Lookup Table and Enabling the Table You can change the values in the luminance lookup table LUT and enable the use of the lookup table The following example refers to using 12 bit ADC data Use the LUT Selector to select a lookup table Currently there is only one lookup table available i e the luminan
42. 2 2 2 2 2 acA640 120uc 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 acA645 100uc 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 acA1300 30uc 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 acA1600 20uc 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 acA1920 25uc 0 2 0 2 64 2 64 2 acA1920 155uc 0 4 0 2 4 4 2 2 acA2000 165uc 0 2 0 2 8 8 2 2 acA2040 90uc 0 2 0 2 8 8 2 2 acA2500 14uc 0 2 0 2 64 2 64 2 acA3800 14uc 0 2 0 2 64 2 64 2 acA4600 10uc 0 2 0 2 64 2 64 2 Table 37 Minimum Settings and Increments for Positioning an Image ROI in Color Cameras without Binning 210 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Settings With Binning Enabled Features D Normally the Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameter settings refer to the physical columns and rows of pixels in the sensor But if binning is enabled these parameters are set in terms of virtual columns and rows For more information see Section 8 7 4 on page 247 Table 38 indicates the minimum ROI height settings when vertical binning is enabled mono cameras acA1920 25uc and acA2500 14uc Camera Model Minimum ROI Height Mono Cameras No Vertical Vertical Binning by Vertical Binning by Vertical Binning by Binning 2 Enabled 3 Enabled 4 Enabled acA640 90um 1 1 1 1 acA640 120um 1 1 1 1 acA645 100um 1 1 1 1 acA1300 30um 1 1 1 1 acA1600 20um 1 1 1 1 acA1920 25um 64 32 22 16 acA1920 25uc 64 32 22 16 acA1920 155um 1 1 1 1 acA2000 165um 1 1 1 1 acA2000 165umNIR 1 1 1 1 acA2040
43. 2 x including PFNC V 1 x and SFNC V 2 x IP30 RoHS USB3 Vision USB IF in preparation The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 1 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 Specification acA645 100um acA645 100uc Sensor Size H x V pixels um 659 x 494 uc 658 x 492 Sensor Type Sony ICX414 AL Sony ICX414 AQ Progressive scan CCD Progressive scan CCD Global shutter Global shutter Optical Size 1 2 Effective Sensor Diagonal 8 2 mm Pixel Size H x V 9 9 um x 9 9 um Max Frame Rate 100 fps at full resolution Mono Color Mono or color color cameras include a Bayer pattern RGB filter on the sensor Data Output Type USB 3 0 nominal max 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed Pixel Formats Mono 8 Mono 12p Mono 8 RGB 8 Mono 12 Bayer BG 8 BGR 8 Bayer BG 12 YCbCr422 8 Bayer BG 12p ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal via the USB 3 0 port or free run Exposure Control Via external trigger signal or programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements Nominal 5 VDC SELV and LPS compliant and in accord with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification s
44. 4 x M2 3 deep 16 5 22 dimension for M2 rt Photosensitive surface 17 526 of the sensor 29 28 29 29 27 87 22 2 7 6 14 5 5 5 18 t 2 x M2 4 deep gt Reference Plane Not to Scale Fig 23 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras with the C mount Basler ace USB 3 0 27 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 1 F zk a al eee 23 7 dimension for M3 y pen I 4 lo fll ol a i g i Bottom g A Ls i P 3xM3 3 deep N 1 d e 4 x M2 3 deep 11 5 22 dimension for M2 ma gt Photosensitive surface 12 526 of the sensor e EIAN amp J EH R z te al al c X 7 zap q 3 Q TRES 14 5 T 7 29 3 gt M a at 5 5 18 36 3 6 9 m c 2 x M2 4 deep Reference Plane Top
45. Basler pylon API to set the Exposure Time parameter value from within your application software The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Set th xposure time to 3500 us camera ExposureTime SetValue 3500 0 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon API and pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 129 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 6 Electronic Shutter Operation All ace cameras are equipped with imaging sensors that have an electronic shutter There are two types of electronic shutter modes used in the sensors global and rolling with the variants electronic rolling and global reset release All ace models except the acA1920 25um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc and acA4600 14uc use sensors with only global shutter modes The acA1920 25um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc and acA4600 14uc models use sensors that support two shutter modes the electronic rolling shutter mode and the global reset release shutter mode The following sections describe the differences between the shutter modes 6 6 1 Global Shutter All Cameras Except acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 All camera models other than the acA1920 25um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc and acA4600 14uc are equipped with an electronic global shutter On cameras equipped with a global shutte
46. Default Selector is used to select the startup set 1 Set the User Set Default Selector to the desired User Set You can set the User Set Default Selector from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the selector If you want to designate the Default User Set as User Set Default camera UserSetDefault SetValue UserSetDefault Default If you want to designate the High Gain User Setas User Set Default camera UserSetDefault SetValue UserSetDefault_HighGain If you want to designate the Auto Functions User Set as User Set Default camera UserSetDefault SetValue UserSetDefault AutoFunctions If you want to designate e g User Set 1as User Set Default camera UserSetDefault SetValue UserSetDefault UserSet1 For more information about the Basler pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 294 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 18 Chunk Features Chunk features are not available for the acA1920 155 camera 8 18 14 What are Chunk Features In most cases enabling a camera feature will simply change the behavior of the camera The Test Image feature is a good example of this type of camera feature When the Test Image feature is enabled the camera outputs a test image rather than a captured image When chunk features are enabled the camera develops some sort of information about
47. ERS mode 138 in global reset release mode 140 limited availability 135 frame burst start overtrigger event 277 frame burst start trigger 97 frame burst start trigger event 277 Frame rate see maximum allowed frame rate 165 frame start overtrigger event 277 frame start trigger sessssss 97 frame start trigger event 277 frame transmission time 162 G AAI ees eee cepere iei nr erates 195 297 maximum allowed setting 196 minimum setting 197 gain Auto fittest heartened 269 gain CHUA Kass sued tede 297 gamma Correction 259 SROB uie cette 185 259 global SNUP uoce eoe 130 global reset release shutter mode 135 145 165 GPIO see general purpose I O Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 H high gain factory setup 289 290 292 294 horizontal DINNING 243 245 horizontal mirror image 252 254 jc ER 186 189 I O configuration 76 direct coupled GPIO 52 63 line status sesesseeeeseee 90 opto isolated l O 52 opto isolated input 57 opto isolated output 60 propagatio
48. Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame start trigger For more information about using a software trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 6 4 2 on page 116 For more information about using a hardware trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 6 4 3 on page 118 trigger Keep in mind that the camera will only react to frame start trigger signals when it is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 6 1 on page 97 and Section 6 3 on page 103 D By default input line Line 1 is selected as the source signal for the frame start Basler ace USB 3 0 113 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Exposure Time Control with the Frame Start Trigger On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s Exposure Time parameter When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to input line Line 1 the exposure time for each frame acquisition can be controlled with the Exposure Time parameter or it can be controlled by manipulating the hardware trigger signal For more information about controlling exposure time when using a software trigger see Section 6 4 2 on page 116 For m
49. Figure 68 for details 148 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Exposure Active on Rolling Shutter Cameras acA1920 25 acA2500 14 Only Some cameras with a rolling shutter imaging sensor can provide an exposure active ExpAc output signal On these cameras the signal goes high when exposure for the first line in a frame begins and goes low when exposure for the last line ends as shown in Figure 69 This behavior applies to both electronic rolling shutter mode and global reset release shutter mode Exposure Active Signal Frame Acquisition N Frame Acquisition N 1 Frame Acquisition N 2 Time Fig 69 Exposure Active Signal on Cameras with a Rolling Shutter Line Exposure L Line Readout The exposure active signal is not available for acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 cameras However the flash window signal is page 150 available and may in some cases serve as an alternative see Section 6 8 2 on Selecting the Exposure Active Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The exposure active output signal can be selected to act as the source signal for an output line e g Line 2 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select the output line e g Line 2 You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application the selector and the parameter
50. GetValue SensorHeight parameter camera SensorHeight GetValue WidthMax parameter camera WidthMax GetValue HeightMax parameter camera HeightMax GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily read the parameters and to read or write the Device User ID You can also use the Basler pylon USB Configurator to read the Device User ID For more information about the pylon API the pylon Viewer and the pylon USB Configurator see Section 3 1 on page 43 286 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 16 User Defined Values The camera can store five user defined values Each value is a 32 bit signed integer value that you can set and read as desired The values simply serve as convenient storage locations for the camera user and have no impact on the operation of the camera The values are designated as Value 1 through Value 5 Setting User Defined Values To set a user defined value using Basler pylon 1 Set the User Defined Value Selector the desired value e g to Value 1 2 Set the User Defined Value parameter to the desired value for the selected value You can use the pylon API to set the User Defined Value Selector and the User Defined Value parameter value from within your application software The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value for Value 1 to 1000 Set user defined value 1 camera UserDefinedValueSele
51. If you want to set offset X make sure the Center X feature for automatic ROI Guidelines for Setting the Image ROI By default the image ROI is set to use the full resolution of the camera s sensor You can change the size and the position of the image ROI by changing the value of the camera s Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameters The value of the Offset X parameter determines the starting column for the region of interest The value of the Offset Y parameter determines the starting row for the region of interest The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the region of interest The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the region of interest The value of the WidthMax parameter determines the maximum allowed width of the region of interest for the current OffsetX setting The value of the HeightMax parameter determines maximum allowed height of the region of interest for the current OffsetY setting When you are setting the camera s region of interest you must follow these guidelines On all camera models The sum of the Offset X setting plus the Width setting must not exceed the width of the camera s sensor For example on the acA1920 25um the sum of the Offset X setting plus the Width setting must not exceed 1920 The sum of the Offset Y setting plus the Height setting must not exceed the height of the camera s sensor For example on the acA1920 25um the sum of the Offset Y setti
52. Lx W x H 29 3 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm without cylindric housing extension or connectors 48 2 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm with cylindric housing extension and connectors Weight 80g Conformity CE UL FCC GenlCam V 2 x including PFNC V 1 x and SFNC V 2 x IP30 RoHS USB3 Vision USB IF in preparation The CE Conformity Declaration for acA3800 14um uc is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Table 8 General Specifications 12 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification acA3800 14um uc acA4600 10uc Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 8 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 1 3 Spectral Response 1 3 1 Mono Camera Spectral Response The following graphs show the spectral response for each available monochrome camera model D The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics and light source characteristics 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative Response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wavelength nm Fig 1 acA640 90um Spectral Response From Sensor
53. Select the frame start trigger Camera 1 riggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera T riggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger camera T riggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set for the trigger width exposure mode camera Set ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode TriggerWidth th xposure overlap time max the shortest exposure tim we plan to use is 1500 us camera l ExposureOverlapTimeMax SetValue 1500 Prepare for frame acquisition here camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Frame acquisition will start each time the externally generated frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig signal goes high Retrieve the captured frames camera AcquisitionStop Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more inf 126 ormation about the pylon API and pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 5 Setting the Exposure Time Parameter manually i e by setting the value of the exposure time parameter The camera also has an Exposure Auto function that can automati
54. Set Load command is therefore not suitable for real time applications it can however be useful for testing purposes D Replacing the sequence controlled parameter values in the active set via the The following code snippet illustrates using the API to load the sequencer set parameter values from sequencer set 1 into the active set Select sequencer set 1 by its index number camera SequencerSetSelector SetValue 1 Load the sequencer parameter values from the sequencer set into the active set camera SequencerSetLoad Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler ace USB 3 0 225 Features AW00123404000 8 6 4 Sequencer Operation In this section you will find a duplicate description of sequencer operation in sequencer mode a general overview employing a state diagram Figure 87 and a more elaborate presentation of selected use cases Figure 88 through Figure 90 As explained in Section 8 6 1 there are a sequencer configuration mode for sequencer configuration and the sequencer mode that allows to apply different sequencer sets in quick succession to different frame acquisitions In the sequencer mode one sequencer set after the other can be loaded into the active set sequencer set advance as frames are acquired The loading is controlled by using certain sequencer trigger sources that can be selected for two schemes of sequencer
55. Sets changes to the active set The active set is located in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The User Sets to Be Configured by the User As mentioned above the active configuration set is stored in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The camera can save most of the settings from the current active set to a reserved area in the camera s non volatile memory A user set that has been saved in the non volatile memory is not lost when the camera is reset or switched off There are three reserved areas in the camera s non volatile memory available for saving user sets that can be configured by the user The three available user sets are called User Set 1 User Set 2 and User Set 3 When the camera is running a saved user set can be loaded into the active set A saved user set can also be designated as the User Set Default i e as the startup set that will be loaded into the active set whenever the camera is powered on or reset Instructions for loading a saved user set into the active set and for designating which set will be the startup set appear below in Section 8 17 3 on page 292 and Section 8 17 1 on page 290 respectively 288 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features The values for the luminance lookup table are not saved in any user set and are lost when the camera is reset or swi
56. an acquired frame from the camera to your host PC The amount of time depends on the bandwidth assigned to the camera If the global reset release shutter mode on acA1920 25um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc and acA4600 10uc cameras is selected overlapped image acquisition is not possible This decreases the camera s maximum allowed frame rate For more information about the global reset release shutter mode see the Global Reset Release Mode Section on page 135 There are two ways for determining the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with your current camera settings You can use the online frame rate calculator found in the Support section of our website Support gt Tools gt Frame Rate Calculator www baslerweb com You can use the Basler pylon API to read the value of the camera s Resulting Frame Rate parameter see the next page For more information about Image ROI Height settings see Section 8 5 on page 207 When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible acquisition frame rate for a given ROI cannot be achieved This results because the camera performs a complete internal setup cycle for each single frame and because it cannot be operated with overlapping sensor readout and exposure overlapped operation To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous acquisition mode and use overlapped operation For more information
57. and the Auto Exposure Time Lower Limit parameters depend on the minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time for your camera model The Auto Target Brightness parameter defines the target average gray value that the exposure auto function will attempt to achieve when it is automatically adjusting the Exposure Time value The target average gray value may range from 0 black to 255 white when the camera is set for an 8 bit pixel format or from 0 black to 4095 white when the camera is set for a 12 bit pixel format Basler ace USB 3 0 271 Features AW00123404000 If the Auto Exposure Time Upper Limit parameter is set to a sufficiently high value the camera s frame rate can be decreased To set the exposure auto function using Basler pylon Select the Auto Function ROI for example ROI 1 2 Set the value of the Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameters for the ROI 3 Set the value of the Auto Exposure Time Lower Limit and Auto Exposure Time Upper Limit parameters 4 Set the value of the Auto Target Brightness parameter 5 Set the value of the Exposure Auto parameter for the once or the continuous mode of operation You can set the exposure auto function from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the exposure auto function Select auto function ROI 1 as an example to allow Exposure Auto to control image bright
58. are loaded into the active set again The sequencer set 1 parameter values in the active set are overwritten Basler ace USB 3 0 237 Features AW00123404000 Use Case Synchronous cycling through sequencer sets according to path 1 cycling interrupted by synchronous reset according to path 0 Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge Frame start triggers applied externally via Line 1 Synchronous trigger source for sequencer set advance Counter 2 End Synchronous trigger source for reset of sequencer set advance GPIO line Line 3 trigger signal generated externally t counting of frame start triggers counted by Counter 2 and limited by Counter Duration number current count v camera loads a sequencer set into the active set making it the current set current sequencer set that is in the active set immediately before the sequencer feature is enabled n current sequencer set that is used for image acquisition sequencer set was just loaded current sequencer set that is used for image acquisition already present in the active set P current sequencer set was in the active set immediately before the sequencer feature was enabled camera is waiting for a frame start trigger E frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequencer Mode Set to Mode Set to On Off Line 3 GPIO Trigger So
59. are using software frame burst start trigger and frame start trigger signals To determine the acquisition status of the camera via the Basler pylon API Use the Acquisition Status Selector to select the Frame Burst Trigger Wait status or the Frame Trigger Wait status Read the value of the Acquisition Status parameter If the value is set to false the camera is not waiting for the trigger signal If the value is set to true the camera is waiting for the trigger signal You can check the acquisition status from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to check the acquisition status Check the frame burst start trigger acquisition status Set the acquisition status selector camera AcquisitionStatusSelector SetValue AcquisitionStatusSelector FrameBurst TriggerWait Read the acquisition status bool a camera AcquisitionStatus GetValue Check the frame start trigger acquisition status Set the acquisition status selector camera AcquisitionStatusSelector SetValue AcquisitionStatusSelector FrameTrig gerWait Read the acquisition status bool b camera AcquisitionStatus GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 152 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 8 4 Tr
60. assigned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer set that is sequencer set 0 into the active set The parameter values for sequencer set 0 overwrite the parameter values for sequencer set 3 in the active set A new cycle of sequencer sets starts An frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 0 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes low When the sequencer feature was disabled by setting the Sequencer Mode parameter value to Off frame exposure and sensor readout were already complete but image transmission out of the camera was not In this case the complete frame will be transmitted even after the sequencer feature was disabled The previous sequencer parameter values occurring in the active set before the sequencer feature was enabled are loaded into the active set again overwriting the parameter values of sequencer set 0 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Use Case Synchronous cycling through sequencer sets according to path 1 cycling not interrupted by reset Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge Frame start triggers applied externally via Line 1 Synchronous triggers assigned to the GPIO lines configured for input Line 4 for path 1 t
61. can cause damage The safe operating I O supply voltage range for the opto isolated output line differs from the safe operating voltage range for the opto isolated input line see Section 5 7 1 on page 57 The safe operating I O supply voltage range for the I O output lines of Basler ace USB 3 0 cameras can differ from the safe operating voltage ranges for the I O output lines of other Basler cameras You must supply power within the safe operating voltage range Voltages The following voltage requirements and information apply to the opto isolated I O output line pin 4 of the 6 pin connector Line 2 Voltage Significance 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum The absolute maximum must never be exceeded Otherwise the camera can be damaged and the warranty becomes void 3 3 to 24 VDC Safe operating I O output supply voltage range lt 43 3 VDC The I O output can operate erratically Table 12 Voltage Requirements and Information for the Opto isolated Output Line Currents The leakage current in the off state should usually not exceed approximately 60 uA and will typically be much lower e g approximately 4 WA at 25 C 77 F housing temperature The actual leakage current depends on camera operating temperature and production spread of electronic components The maximum load current allowed through the output circuit is 50 mA There is no specific minimum load current but you need to consider s
62. captured image goes through a two step conversion process as it exits the sensor and passes through the camera s electronics This process yields Y Cb and Cr color information for each pixel In the first step of the process a demosaicing algorithm is performed to get RGB data for each pixel This is required because color cameras with a Bayer filter on the sensor gather only one color of light for each individual pixel The second step of the process is to convert the RGB information to the YCbCr color model The conversion algorithm uses the following formulas Y 0 299R 0 587G 0 114 B Cb 0 16874 R 0 33126 G 0 5000B 128 Cr 0 5000 R 0 41869 G 0 08131 B 128 After conversion to the YCbCr color model is complete the pixel data is transmitted to the host PC Mono Format Most cameras equipped with a Bayer pattern color filter can output monochrome images based on pixel data in the Mono 8 format When a color camera is set for Mono 8 the pixel values in each captured image are first demosaiced and converted to the YCbCr color model as described above The camera then transmits the 8 bit Y value for each pixel to the host PC In the YCbCr color model the Y component for each pixel represents a brightness value This brightness value can be considered as equivalent to the value that would be sent from a pixel in a monochrome camera So in essence when a color camera is set for Mono 8 it outputs an 8 bit monochrome image
63. demonstrating how to set up the build environment to build applications based on the API Basler ace USB 3 0 45 Camera Drivers and Tools for Changing Camera Parameters AW00123404000 46 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Camera Functional Description 4 Camera Functional Description This chapter provides an overview of the camera s functionality from a system perspective The overview will aid your understanding when you read the more detailed information included in the later chapters of the user s manual 4 1 Overview acA640 90 acA640 120 acA645 100 acA1300 30 acA1600 20 The camera provides features such as a global shutter and electronic exposure time control Exposure start and exposure time can be controlled by parameters transmitted to the camera via the Basler pylon API and the USB 3 0 interface There are also parameters available to set the camera for single frame acquisition or continuous frame acquisition Exposure start can also be controlled via an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal applied to a camera input line The ExFSTrig signal facilitates periodic or non periodic frame acquisition start Modes are available that allow the length of exposure time to be directly controlled by the ExFSTrig signal or to be set for a pre programmed period of time Accumulated charges are read out of the sensor when exposure ends At readout accumulated charges are transported from the sensor s light s
64. each image that it acquires In these cases the information is added to each image as a trailing data chunk when the image is transferred to the host PC Examples of this type of camera feature are the frame counter feature and the time stamp feature For example when the Gain chunk is used the camera checks after an image is captured the gain All parameter value used for the image acquisition and develops a data chunk to be appended to the image data And if the time stamp chunk feature is enabled the camera develops a time stamp data chunk The gain and the timestamp data chunks would be added as trailing data to each image as the image is transferred from the camera The features that add chunks to the acquired images are referred to as chunk features After the data chunks were transmitted to the PC they must be retrieved For more information about retrieving chunk data see Section 8 18 4 on page 303 8 18 2 Chunk Mode Active When Chunk Mode Active is enabled the camera is in a state where it can generate and append chunk data to image data and transmit them to the PC Note Chunk data can only be appended to image data when Chunk Mode Active is enabled Disabling Chunk Mode Active prevents chunk data from being to be appended to image data Basler ace USB 3 0 295 Features AW00123404000 The individual data chunks e g the Gain chunk can be selected to be appended to image data regardless of whether Chunk Mode Active is
65. exposure auto function automatically adjusts the Exposure Time parameter value within set limits until a target average gray value for the pixel data from the selected Auto Function ROI is reached Either Auto Function ROI can be selected to work with the exposure auto function The exposure auto function can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If the Auto Function ROI does not overlap the Image ROI see the Auto Function ROI section the pixel data from the Auto Function ROI will not be used to control the exposure time Instead the current manual setting of the Exposure Time parameter value will control the exposure time The exposure auto function and the gain auto function can be used at the same time In this case however you must also set the auto function profile feature When trigger width exposure mode is selected the exposure auto function is not available For more information about setting the exposure time manually see Section 6 9 on page 162 For more information about the trigger width exposure mode see Section 6 4 3 2 on page 119 For more information about the auto function profile feature see Section 8 12 6 on page 274 The limits within which the camera will adjust the Exposure Time parameter are defined by the Auto Exposure Time Upper Limit and the Auto Exposure Time Lower Limit parameters The current minimum and the maximum allowed settings for the Auto Exposure Time Upper Limit parameter
66. for the global reset release mode In global reset release mode the flash window opens when the frame is triggered and closes after a time period equal to the Exposure Time parameter setting Thus the flash window width i e how long the flash window will remain open is equal to the Exposure Time parameter setting Line 11 ee Lam e e Line N 2 C M EA E E LAN Line N Flash Window Width A Y 1 line exposure time i line readout time Fig 61 Flash Window for Rolling Shutter in the Global Reset Release Mode For more information about the Exposure Time parameter see Section 6 5 on page 127 140 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control The Flash Window Signal Cameras with a rolling shutter imaging sensor acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 models can provide a flash window output signal to aid you in the use of flash lighting The flash window signal will go high when the flash window for each image acquisition opens and will go low when the flash window closes For more information about the flash window signal see Section 6 8 2 on page 150 Basler ace USB 3 0 141 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 7 Overlapping Image Acquisitions 6 7 1 Overlapping Image Acquisitions for all Models Except acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 The frame acquisition process on the camera includes two distinct parts The first part is the exposure of the pi
67. form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 34 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 8 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems The cameras are frequently installed in industrial environments These environments often include devices that generate electromagnetic interference EMI and they are prone to electrostatic discharge ESD Excessive EMI and ESD can cause problems with your camera such as false triggering or can cause the camera to suddenly stop capturing images EMI and ESD can also have a negative impact on the quality of the imag
68. format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 2048 Shift by 2 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the output from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 0 ADC from the ADC along with 2 zeros as LSBs bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit at The result of shifting twice is that the output of o S oe m Sce the camera is effectively multiplied by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the 2 least S significant bits output from the camera for each p pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 4th value for example 4 8 16 20 and so on Shifted Twice B If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 2 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 1024 Shift by 3 When the camera is set to shift by 3 the output from the camera will include bit 8 ADC through bit 0 from the ADC along with 3 DPF zeros as LSBs i gyng The result of shifting 3 times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied m LI S S by 8 i Shifted Three Times d When the camera is set to shift by 3 the 3 least significant bits output from the camera for each pi
69. index number Set the camera parameter values as desired Set the sequencer set related parameter values for path 0 D on eD Set the sequencer set related parameter values for path 1 Note The following step will replace any previous parameter settings for the selected sequencer set 7 Store the sequencer set with its changed parameter values The sequencer set is available for use by the sequencer feature with new parameter values You can configure the sequencer and sequencer sets from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates configuring the parameters for sequencer start and for sequencer set 0 and storing sequencer set 0 using the API to set the parameter values The example assumes that you have already set the current camera parameter values as desired for sequencer set 0 The example assumes that you are setting the parameter values for sequencer set 0 as given in Figure 88 on page 233 and Table 41 on page 229 Basler ace USB 3 0 223 Features AW00123404000 Disable the sequencer featur camera SequencerMode SetValue SequencerMode Off Enable the sequencer configuration mode camera SequencerConfigurationMode SetValue SequencerConfigurationMode_On Select the first sequencer set always sequencer set 0 camera SequencerSetStart SetValue 0 Select a sequencer set by its index number camera SequencerSetSelecto
70. input line are connected to the same ground For applicable pins see Table 10 on page 52 and for line schematics see Figure 35 Figure 38 and Figure 39 90 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface Line Status for Opto isolated Input Line Line 1 External Conditions Resulting Status Line Inverter Status Electrical Status Logical Line Status Binary Expression Parameter Value Disabled Input Open or False 0 Connection at z Status Voltage Level Low False 0 Voltage Level High True 1 Enabled Input Open or True 1 Connection at z Status Voltage Level Low True 1 Voltage Level High False 0 Table 18 Line Status for Different External Conditions Line 1 Opto isolated Input Line Status for Direct coupled GPIO Lines Line 3 Line 4 Set for Input External Conditions Resulting Status Line Inverter Status Electrical Status Logical Line Status Binary Expression Parameter Value Disabled Input Open or True 1 Connection at z Status Voltage Level Low False 0 Voltage Level High True 1 Enabled Input Open or False 0 Connection at z Status Voltage Level Low True 1 Voltage Level High False 0 Table 19 Line Status for Different External Conditions Line 3 Line 4 Direct coupled GPIO Input Basler ace USB 3 0 91 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 13 2 Line Status for Output Lines This section informs about the relation betwe
71. is illustrated in Figure 88 on page 233 and assumes that the following sequencer related parameter values are set Sequencer Set Related Settings Sequencer Sequencer Sequencer Sequencer Set 0 Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Path 0 Next sequencer set after current one 0 o 0 0 Trigger source Line 3 GPIO Line 3 GPIO Line 3 GPIO Line 3 GPIO Trigger activation Level High Level High Level High Level High Path 1 Next sequencer set after current one 1 2 3 0 Trigger source Line 4 GPIO Line 4 GPIO Line 4 GPIO Line 4 GPIO Trigger activation Level High Level High Level High Level High Table 41 Settings for Sequencer Operation According to Use Case 1 Only one trigger source for a path allowed Applies Always Not Only in this Example Basler ace USB 3 0 229 Features AW00123404000 Use Case One in Overview Use case one demonstrates synchronous triggering cycling through all the available four sequencer sets not disturbed by a reset The possibility of repeatedly applying a sequencer set to a succession of frame acquisitions is also shown The GPIO lines are configured for input and allow to control sequencer set advance for path 0 and path 1 by external triggers The frame start trigger is controlled by external signals via the opto isolated input line Line 1 Accordingly sequencer operation and frame acquisition are all controlled b
72. limits Typically the range of the extended limits is dictated by the physical restrictions of the camera s electronic devices such as the absolute limits of the camera s variable gain control The values for any extended limits can be determined by using the Basler pylon Viewer or from within your application via the pylon API Currently the feature can only be applied to the gain feature Removing the parameter limits on the gain feature will only remove the lower regular limit When the lower regular limit is removed the gain All parameter value can be decreased to a negative value For more information about the gain feature see Section 8 1 on page 195 Removing Parameter Limits To remove the limits for a parameter value 1 Use the Parameter Limits Selector to select the parameter whose limits you want to remove 2 Set the value of the Remove Parameter Limits parameter You can set the Parameter Limits Selector and the value of the Remove Parameter Limits parameter from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the feature whose factory limits will be removed camera RemoveParameterLimitSelector SetValue RemoveParameterLimitSelector Gain Remove the limits for the selected feature camera RemoveParameterLimit SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer applicat
73. load currents decrease higher impedance circuits tend to be more susceptible to EMI higher currents yield higher voltage drop on long cables As shown in Figure 40 shows the applicable electrical circuit when a GPIO line is set to operate as an output The figure is drawn to specifically apply to pin 1 Line 3 as an example but with the necessary modifications it equally applies to pin 3 Line 4 3 3 VDC 1 Typical 1 3 3 to 24 T VDC 6 pin Recept acle Voltage Output Signal to You Ground for Direct coupled GPIO be a l G l l l M l l l H Fig 40 Direct coupled GPIO Line Schematic with the GPIO Line Set as an Output and with a Typical Voltage Output Circuit Illustration for Pin 1 as an Example Simplified For more information about GPIO pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 5 2 1 on page 52 For more information about setting the GPIO line operation see Section 5 11 on page 76 and Section 5 12 on page 80 68 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 10 Temporal Performance of I O Lines This section describes delays propagation delays resulting from the operation of the camera s input and output lines For image acquisition the propagation delays must be added to the delays described in Section 6 on page 97 You will need the information included in this section most likely only if you need microsecond accuracy when controlling camera operation via I O lines A
74. ml a gt Exposure Total Wanted lt gt Fig 54 Trigger Width Exposure with Adjusted Rising Edge Triggering Exposure Start Delays Is Omitted Note that C4 is identical to the camera s minimum allowed exposure time For the camera s minimum allowed exposure times see Table 23 on page 127 122 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Camera Model Pixel Format Device Link Throughput MByte s Exposure Time Offset Bit Depth C ys acA2000 165 8 bit lt 108 000 42 CUL 108 000 to lt 140 000 32 gt 140 000 to lt 160 020 28 gt 160 020 to lt 180 000 25 gt 180 000 to lt 192 112 24 gt 192 112 to lt 216 000 42 gt 216 000 to lt 280 000 32 gt 280 000 to lt 320 040 28 gt 320 040 to lt 360 000 25 gt 360 000 to lt 384 224 24 12 bit All allowed values 28 Table 22 Exposure Time Offset C4 Depending on Pixel Format Bit depth and Device Link Throughput 50 45 J 40 y acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 8 bit T 35 acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 12 bit O 30 4 D m i T O 254 i e o M E 204 J o 2 O 15 x lt LLI 104 3 5 0 0 100 200 300 400 Device Link Throughput MByte s Fig 55 Exposure Time Offsets Depending on Device Link Throughput All 8 bit and 12 bit Pixel Formats Basler ace USB 3 0 123 Image Acquisition Control AW001
75. names throughout the manual related to the release of the Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite Included information throughout the document about the following cameras acA640 90um uc acA1920 25um uc series cameras acA2000um umNIR uc acA2040 80um umNIR uc acA3800 14um uc and acA4600 10uc prototype cameras Replaced pixel data format by pixel format throughout the document Replaced pixel size by pixel edge length in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added information about the CS mount in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added Mounting Instructions as Section 1 5 on page 31 Updated the LZ4 license text in Section 1 7 on page 34 Modified Section 1 9 2 on page 36 to better avoid EMI problems Expanded the precautions about avoiding dust on the sensor about using the correct plug and about cleaning properly in Section 1 10 on page 37 Added a reference to the Recommended Components for Basler USB 3 0 Cameras document in Section 2 on page 41 Added a reference to cable documentation in Section 5 5 on page 54 Added the following sections Section 5 10 on page 69 Section 5 11 2 on page 77 Section 5 12 on page 80 Section 5 13 on page 90 Section 6 on page 97 Section 7 on page 177 Section 8 on page 195 Described how to use the Basler pylon USB Configurator for contacting Basler technical support in Section 9 3 on page 306 AW00123403000 05 Sep 2014 Internal release AW00123404000 17 Jun 2015 Minor addition
76. of exposure After the exposure time for a frame acquisition is complete the camera begins reading out the acquired frame data from the imaging sensor and makes them available for transmission as called by the host PC The exposure start delay is the amount of time between the point where the trigger signal transitions and the point where exposure actually begins The exposure start delay varies from camera model to camera model The table below shows the exposure start delay for each camera model see Table 31 on page 163 The sensor readout time is the amount of time it takes to read out the data for an acquired frame from the imaging sensor The frame transmission time is the amount of time it takes to transmit an acquired frame from the camera to the host PC via the bus The frame transmission time can vary between frames and partly depends on when the host PC calls for data transmission The transmission start delay is the amount of time between the point where the camera begins reading out the acquired frame data from the sensor to the point where it begins transmitting the data for the acquired frame from the buffer to the host PC The transmission start delay can vary between frames and largely depends on when the host PC starts calling for data transmission Note that a propagation delay of unspecified duration precedes the exposure start delay when applying an ExFSTrig signal For more information about propagation delays see
77. parser that is included in the C API for Basler pylon software and via the device node map For more information about accessing chunk data see the documentation for the C or C API in the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference for C or C respectively 304 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Troubleshooting and Support 9 Troubleshooting and Support This chapter outlines the resources available to you if you need help working with your camera 9 1 Tech Support Resources If you need advice about your camera or if you need assistance troubleshooting a problem with your camera you can contact the Basler technical support team for your area Basler technical support contact information is located in the front pages of this manual You will also find helpful information such as frequently asked questions downloads and application notes in the Support and Downloads sections of our website www baslerweb com If you do decide to contact Basler technical support please take a look at Section 9 3 on page 306 before you call The section gives information about assembling relevant data that will help the Basler technical support team to help you with your problem 9 2 Obtaining an RMA Number Whenever you want to return material to Basler you must request a Return Material Authorization RMA number before sending it back The RMA number must be stated in your delivery documents when you ship your material to us Please be aware
78. red green and blue The identity matrix is used when Off is selected as the light source preset Setting the Light Source Presets You can use the Light Source Preset parameter value to set the correction for a specific light source or chose no correction You can set the parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Set the LightSourcePreset parameter value to Off no correction camera LightSourcePreset SetValu LightSource Preset Off Set the LightSourcePreset parameter value to Daylight5000K camera Set camera Set camera LightSourcePreset SetValu LightSourcePreset SetValu LightSourcePreset SetValu Basler ace USB 3 0 LightSource the LightSourcePreset parameter value LightSource the LightSourcePreset parameter value LightSource Preset Daylight5000K to Daylight6500K Preset Daylight6500K to Tungsten2800K Preset Tungsten2800K 185 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00123404000 7 3 3 Color Adjustment All Color Cameras Except acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 The camera s color adjustment feature lets you adjust hue and saturation for the primary and secondary colors in the RGB color space Each adjustment affects those colors in the image where the adjusted primary or secondary color predominates F
79. reset release mode allows for longer useful exposure times In global reset release mode the flash window opens immediately after the frame start trigger has occurred For switching a flash on and off you therefore do not have to wait and do not depend on the flash window signal but can use the Exposure Active signal instead if available For more information about the Exposure Active signal see Section 6 8 1 on page 148 136 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Frame Start Triggered Total Readout Time N i Sensor Readout Time Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 MA Line 4 M Line 5 TUN Line 6 MA Line 7 EEUU Line e p Line o TUN Line 10 TUN Line 11 D tRow Line N 2 a Line N 1 EUN Line N TUN Cy Total Runtime GG line exposure time W line readout time Fig 59 Rolling Shutter in the Global Reset Release Mode You can calculate the total readout time using this formula Total Readout Time tRow x ROI Height C us You can calculate the total runtime using the following formula Total Runtime Exposure Time Parameter Setting Total Readout Time The cameras can provide an exposure active output signal that will go high when the exposure time for line one begins and will go low when the exposure time for line one ends When the camera is operating with the rolling shutter in the global release mode the use of flash lighting is most strongly recommended The came
80. ri a Cc ie eo A ri ri ri ri ri ri ri Frame Start un un un i 610 i 110 Trigger Signal 2 4 24 222 22522 22 22c222 22s622224 c 22 2 222 222240J 2 Time Fig 77 Use Case 1 Frame Burst Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger Off Basler ace USB 3 0 169 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Use Case 2 Frame Burst Start Trigger Off Frame Start Trigger On Use case two is illustrated on page 171 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to off and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the frame burst start trigger is set to off the user does not need to apply frame burst start trigger signals to the camera The camera will generate all required frame burst start trigger signals internally Because the frame start trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera in order to begin each frame exposure In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line Line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to Line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal This type of camera setup is used frequently in industrial applications One example might be a wood products inspection system used to inspect the surface of pieces of plywood on a conveyor belt as they pass by a ca
81. see Section 3 1 on page 43 224 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 6 3 3 Using the Load Command There is also the Sequencer Set Load command that can be useful when working with the sequencer sets for testing purposes If you select a sequencer set by using its index number and then you execute the Sequencer Set Load command the sequencer controlled parameter values in the active set will be replaced by the values stored for the selected sequencer set This ability can be useful in two situations First if you simply want to see how the parameters currently stored for one of the sequencer sets will affect camera operation you can load the parameters from that sequencer set into the active set and see what happens Second if you want to prepare a new sequencer set and you know that an existing set is already close to what you will need you can load the existing sequencer set into the active set make some small changes to the active set and then save the active set as a new sequencer set Make sure the sequencer mode is set to Off before issuing the Sequence Set Load command Sequencer Set Load command is associated with a delay between sending the software command and it becoming effective The delay will depend on the specific installation and the current load on the network Accordingly the number of image acquisitions that can occur between sending the command and it becoming effective can not be predicted The Sequencer
82. that is optimized for human vision The optimum for machine vision may require different color enhancement settings To set the color enhancements 1 7 Arrange your camera so that it is viewing a scene similar to what it will view during actual oper ation Make sure that the lighting for the scene is as close as possible to the actual lighting you will be using during normal operation Using lighting that represents your normal operating conditions is extremely important We recommend placing a standard color chart within your camera s field of view when you are adjusting the color enhancements This will make it much easier to know when the colors are properly adjusted One widely used chart is the ColorChecker chart also known as the Macbeth chart Make sure the setttings for gain black level digital shift auto target brightness are at their minimums Set the Light Source Preset parameter to the value that is most appropriate for your lighting For example If you use tungsten incandescent light select the Tungsten2800K light source preset Begin capturing images and check the basic image appearance Set the exposure time black level and gain so that you are acquiring good quality images It is important to make sure that the images are not over exposed Over exposure can have a significant negative effect on the fidelity of the color in the acquired images Generally the settings for black level digital shift auto t
83. the RGB color space can be formed Combining colored light is referred to as additive mixing When two primary colors are mixed at equal intensities the secondary colors will result The mixing of red and green light produces yellow light Y the mixing of green and blue light produces cyan light C and the mixing of blue and red light produces magenta light M When the three primary colors are mixed at maximum intensities white will result In the absence of light black will result The color space can be represented as a color cube see Figure 82 on page 188 where the primary colors R G B the secondary colors C M Y and black and white define the corners All shades of gray are represented by the line connecting the black and the white corner For ease of imagination the color cube can be projected onto a plane as shown in Figure 82 such that a color hexagon is formed The primary and secondary colors define the corners of the color hexagon in an alternating fashion The edges of the color hexagon represent the colors resulting from mixing the primary and secondary colors The center of the color hexagon represents all shades of gray including black and white The representation of any arbitrary color of the RGB color space will lie within the color hexagon The color will be characterized by its hue and saturation Hue specifies the kind of coloration for example whether the color is red yellow orange etc Saturation expr
84. the User Output 1 signal is selected as the source signal for output line Line 2 The Exposure Active signal is not available for acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 cameras We recommend using the Flash Window signal instead You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 80 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 the frame burst trigger wait signals and frame trigger wait signals see Section 6 8 4 on page 153 the exposure active signal see Section 6 8 1 on page 148 the flash window signal see Section 6 6 2 1 on page 138 and Section 6 8 2 on page 150 working with the timer output signal see Section 5 12 6 on page 88 setting the status of a user settable output line see Section 5 12 3 on page 84 the electrical characteristics of the opto isolated output line see Section 5 8 on page 60 Basler ace USB 3 0 81 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 12 2 Line Minimum Output Pulse Width It can occur that an output signal sent by the camera will not be detected by some receivers This can happen when the output signal is too narrow or if it reaches its new signal level too slowly To ensure reliable detection the Line Minimum Output Pulse Width feat
85. to a new frame start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the camera s Exposure Mode parameter must be set to timed The exposure time for each acquired frame will be determined by the value of the camera s Exposure Time parameter Software Frame Start Software Frame Start Trigger Signal Received Trigger Signal Received Frame Acquisition a p Exposure Exposure duration determined by the Exposure Time parameter Fig 50 Frame Acquisition with a Software Frame Start Trigger When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the frame rate will be determined by how often you apply a software trigger signal to the camera and you should not attempt to trigger frame acquisition at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed for the current camera settings There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate in Section 6 10 on page 165 Software frame start trigger signals that are applied to the camera when it is not ready to receive them will be ignored Section 6 4 2 2 on page 117 includes more detailed information about applying a software frame start trigger signal to the camera using Basler pylon For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 6 10 on page 165 116 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW0012340
86. using the color adjustment feature Keep in mind that when you adjust a color the colors on each side of it in the color hexagon will also be affected to some degree For example when you adjust red yellow and magenta will also be affected When you are making hue and saturation adjustments it is a good idea to start by concentrating on one line in the color chart Once you have the colors in a line properly adjusted you can move on to each of the other lines in turn When you first start working with the color enhancement tools it is easy to badly misadjust the color adjustment settings and not be able to bring them back into proper adjustment You can reset the parameter settings by camera reset of power up Certain conditions outside the camera such as the lighting the camera lens filter or the monitor settings are relevant to the reproduction of color in the image If you change any of these conditions you will have to repeat the above procedure to preserve optimum color reproduction 194 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 8 Features Features This chapter provides detailed information about the features available on each camera This chapter also includes explanations of the parameters associated with each feature and how to operate the features 8 1 Gain The camera s gain feature is an analog feature allowing to adjust gain As shown in Figure 84 increasing the gain increases the slope of the response curve for the camer
87. value is set to 1 the output pixel brightness will not be corrected The gamma correction value of 1 is the default value after camera reset or power up A gamma correction value between 0 and 1 will result in increased overall brightness anda gamma correction value greater than 1 will result in decreased overall brightness In all cases black output pixel brightness equals 0 and white output pixel brightness equals 255 at 8 bit output and 4095 at 12 bit output will not be corrected Basler ace USB 3 0 259 Features AW00123404000 Setting Gamma Correction You can use the Gamma parameter to set the gamma correction value Set the Gamma parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value to 1 2 as an example Set the Gamma value to 1 2 camera Gamma SetValue 1 2 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 260 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 12 Auto Functions 8 12 1 Common Characteristics Auto functions control image properties and are the automatic counterparts of certain features such as the gain feature or the white balance feature which normally require manually setting the related parameter values Auto functions are particularly useful when an image prop
88. value of the line status all chunk to true Basler ace USB 3 0 297 Features AW00123404000 Once the line status all chunk is enabled and Chunk Mode Active is enabled the camera will append a line status all chunk to each acquired image After an image with an appended chunk has been received by your PC the chunk must be retrieved For information about retrieving data chunks see Section 8 18 4 on page 303 You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon Camera Software Suite The following code snippet illustrates using the API to activate the chunk mode select the line status all chunk and enable the line status all chunk make chunk mode active select and enable Line Ststua All chunk camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector LineStatusAll camera ChunkEnable SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Camera Software Suite and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 8 18 3 3 Exposure Time Chunk The exposure time chunk feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing the exposure time parameter value in us used for the image acquisition To enable the exposure time chunk 1 Use the Chunk Selector to select the Exposure Time chunk 2 Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the expos
89. with 8 Bit Pixel Formats 0 0 0 0 eee eee 203 8 4 8 Precautions When Using Digital Shift 000 205 8 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift llle 206 8 5 Image Region of Interest ROI lisse 207 8 5 1 Center X and Center Y 0 cee ee 213 8 5 2 Changing ROI Parameters On the Fly lsslseesls esses 213 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Table of Contents 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 Sequericer i woe alee Bate BO A te aes Sie E f ie 214 8 6 1 Introduction eseria finie AA eae RA A Pik od Le as 214 8 6 2 The Sequencer and the Active Set 0 0 e eee eee 215 8 6 2 1 Camera Parameters 0000 cece eee 216 8 6 2 2 Sequencer Set Related Parameters and Sequencer Set Advance 217 8 6 3 Sequencer Configuration 0 0c eee 222 8 6 3 1 General Information 0 200000 cee ee 222 8 6 3 2 Carrying Out Configuration 0 0 0 2 eee 223 8 6 3 3 Using the Load Command 000 0c eee eee 225 8 6 4 Sequencer Operation 0 0 0 eee eee 226 8 6 4 4 Sequencer Use Case Descriptions and Diagrams 229 BUI ici aha Sek tok 2S AE NI Od leat Seal ELM SES 243 8 7 4 Binning on Monochrome Cameras 0 0 e eee ee 243 8 7 2 Binning on Color Cameras acA1920 25uc and acA2500 14uc Only 245 8 7 3 Setting Binning liliis e 246 8 7 4 Consider
90. 000 6 8 Acquisition Monitoring Tools 6 8 1 Exposure Active Signal Exposure Active on Global Shutter Cameras All Models Except the acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 Cameras with a global shutter imaging sensor can provide an exposure active ExpAc output signal On these cameras the signal goes high when the exposure time for each frame acquisition begins and goes low when the exposure time ends as shown in Figure 68 This signal can be used as a flash trigger and is also useful when you are operating a system where either the camera or the object being imaged is movable For example assume that the camera is mounted on an arm mechanism and that the mechanism can move the camera to view different portions of a product assembly Typically you do not want the camera to move during exposure In this case you can monitor the ExpAc signal to know when exposure is taking place and thus know when to avoid moving the camera Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N42 2 us 103 5 us a lt EE 2 us to 3 5 us a lt 64 i i 10 us to 26 Us e i 10 Us to 26 us gt ExpAc x j i i 10h us a Signal Timing charts are not drawn to scale Times stated are typical Fig 68 Exposure Active Signal on Cameras with a Global Shutter and the fall of the signal in relation to the start and the end of exposure See D When you use the exposure active signal be aware that there is a delay in the rise
91. 10 on page 52 and for line schematics see Figure 36 Figure 37 and Figure 40 92 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Line Status for Opto isolated Output Line Line 2 Physical Interface External Conditions Resulting Status External Line Inverter User Output Logical Line Binary Voltage Level Pull Up Status Status Siatus Expression Connection Parameter Status Value Pull Up Disabled Disabled True 1 High SOHBSEIS Enabled False 0 Low Enabled Disabled False 0 Low Enabled True 1 High Pull Up Disabled Disabled True 1 Not defined SESS Enabled False 0 Low Enabled Disabled False 0 Low Enabled True 1 Not defined Table 20 Line Status for Different External Conditions Line 2 Opto isolated Output Line Status for Direct coupled GPIO Lines Line 3 Line 4 Set for Output External Conditions Resulting Status External Line Inverter User Output Logical Line Binary Voltage Level Pull Up Status Status Status Expression Connection Parameter Status Value Pull Up Disabled Disabled True 1 High Pannen Enabled False 0 Low Enabled Disabled False 0 Low Enabled True 1 High Pull Up Disabled Disabled True 1 High PRUNUS Enabled False 0 Low Enabled Disabled False 0 Low Enabled True 1 High Table 21 Line Status for Different External Conditions Lines 3 and 4 Direct coupled GPIO Output Basler ace USB 3 0 93 Physical Interface AW001 2
92. 23404000 To obtain a certain wanted exposure time with trigger width exposure mode you will have to adjust the ExFSTrig signal in order to compensate for the automatically added exposure time offset C4 Subtract the applicable value for C4 see Table 22 and Figure 55 from the wanted exposure time Use the resulting adjusted time as the high time for the ExFSTrig signal if the signal is not inverted or as the low time if the signal is inverted width exposure mode In all other exposure modes where the Exposure Time parameter is set the camera automatically adjusts for the exposure time offset C4 You will have to adjust the timing for the ExFSTrig signal only if you use the trigger Note that the C4 exposure time does not affect the moment of exposure start When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode you must also set the camera s Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter This parameter setting will be used by the camera to operate the Frame Trigger Wait signal You should set the Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter value to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure mode and that you intend to use the ExFSTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us In this case you would set the camera s Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter to 3000 us For more information about the Frame Trigger Wait signal and the
93. 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 253 Features AW00123404000 8 9 2 Reverse Y acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 Only The reverse Y feature is a vertical mirror image feature When the reverse Y feature is enabled the lines in a captured image will be swapped top to bottom This means that the top line in the image will be swapped with the bottom line the next to top line will be swapped with the next to bottom line and so on Figure 102 shows a normal image on the left and and an image captured with reverse Y enabled on the right Normal Image Reverse Y Mirror Image gi ua Fig 102 Reverse Y Mirror Imaging Using ROls with Reverse Y You can use the ROI feature when using the reverse X feature Note however that the position of an ROI relative to the sensor remains the same regardless of whether or not the reverse Y feature is enabled see Figure 103 As a consequence an image ROI will display different images depending on whether or not the reverse Y feature is enabled 254 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Normal Image Mirror Image i ili erah 0000000000000000 SP SE MP eoocccoosce on ae as 0060060000006006006 eta rro y cs TM ipm ROI ROI Fig 103 Using an ROI with Reverse Y Mirror Imaging For color cameras provisions are made ensuring that the effective color filter alignment will be constant for normal and mirror images You can use the ROI feature when using the r
94. 3 5 2 For more information about the electrical characteristics of Line 1 see Section 5 7 1 on page 57 and of GPIO Line 3 and Line 4 set for input see Section 5 9 2 1 on page 65 Basler ace USB 3 0 109 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 3 5 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Frame Burst Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware frame burst start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values required to enable rising edge hardware frame burst start triggering with for example Line 1 as the trigger source Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when frame burst start triggering is on camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the frame burst start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameBurstStart Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the activation mode for the selected trigger to rising edge camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the acquisition burst frame count camera AcquisitionBurstFrameCount SetValue 5
95. 3404000 5 14 Checking I O Line Status 5 14 1 Checking the Status of All I O Lines You can check the current status of all input and output lines with a single operation by reading the value of the LineStatusAll parameter The status depends on whether an electrical signal is applied to the line on the voltage level and on the settings of the line inverter and user output output lines In addition the line logic as set by the factory determines fundamentally whether a given electrical signal level will be considered to correspond to a true or false line status Positive line logic is used for the input lines The line status of a GPIO line Line 3 Line 4 does not depend on the configuration of the GPIO line for input or output The LineStatusAll parameter value is expressed as a hexadecimal number in the Basler pylon Viewer and as a 32 bit word that you can read using the Basler pylon API As shown in Figure 48 each bit from bit 0 through 3 is associated with a different I O line The status of each I O line is expressed by its related binary parameter value If a bit is O it indicates that the line status of the associated line is currently low If a bit is 1 it indicates that the line status of the associated line is currently high When you read the hexadecimal number of the LineStatusAll parameter value convert it to its binary equivalent to make the current status of each I O line immediately apparent
96. 4 7mm Pixel Size H x V 7 4 um x 7 4 um 5 6 um x 5 6 um Max Frame Rate 100 fps 120 fps Mono Color Mono or color color models include a Bayer pattern RGB filter on the sensor Data Output Type USB 3 0 nominal max 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed Pixel Formats Mono Models Mono 8 Mono 12p Mono 12 Color Models Mono 8 RGB 8 Bayer BG 8 BGR 8 Bayer BG 12 YCbCr422 8 Bayer BG 12p ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal via the USB 3 0 port or free run Exposure Control Via external trigger signal or programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements Nominal 5 VDC SELV and LPS compliant and in accord with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification supplied via the camera s USB 3 0 port 2 7 W typical 3 0 W max 2 4 W typical and max 5 VDC 5 VDC I O Lines 1 opto isolated input line 1 opto isolated output line and 2 direct coupled GPIO lines power supplies must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Lens Mount C mount CS mount Size L x W x H 29 3 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm without cylindric housing extension or connectors 48 2 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm with cylindric housing extension and connectors Weight lt 80g Table 1 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification acA640 90um uc acA640 120um uc Conformity CE UL FCC GenlCam V
97. 4000 Image Acquisition Control 6 4 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software frame start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software frame start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode In this example the trigger mode for the frame burst start trigger will be set to off Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the frame burst start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_Off Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter internal frame rate control and allow you to software frame start trigger signals camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue fals Select the frame start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_ Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger FrameBurstStart this will disable the camera s control the frame rate with FrameStart camera Trigge
98. 4000 Image Acquisition Control 6 10 2 Increasing the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate You may find that you would like to acquire frames at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with the camera s current settings In this case you must adjust one or more of the factors that can influence the maximum allowed rate and then check to see if the maximum allowed rate has increased Decreasing the height of the Image ROI can have a significant impact on the maximum allowed frame rate If possible in your application decrease the height of the Image ROI If you are using normal exposure times and you are using the camera at it s maximum resolution your exposure time will not normally restrict the frame rate However if you are using long exposure times or small areas of interest it is possible that your exposure time is limiting the maximum allowed frame rate If you are using a long exposure time or a small ROI try using a shorter exposure time and see if the maximum allowed frame rate increases You may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by using a brighter light source or increasing the opening of your lens aperture The frame transmission time will not normally restrict the frame rate But if you are using multiple cameras connected to one hub you may find that the transmission time is restricting the maximum allowed rate In this case you could use a multiport host adapter in the PC instead of a hub If you are working with an ac
99. 5 fps Mono Color Mono or color color cameras include a Bayer pattern RGB filter on the sensor Data Output Type USB 3 0 nominal max 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed Pixel Formats Mono 8 Mono 12p Bayer RG 8 Mono 12 Bayer RG 12 Bayer RG 12p ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal via the USB 3 0 port or free run Exposure Control Via external trigger signal or programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements Nominal 5 VDC SELV and LPS compliant and in accord with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification supplied via the camera s USB 3 0 port 3 4 W max 5 VDC I O Lines 1 opto isolated input line 1 opto isolated output line and 2 direct coupled GPIO lines power supplies must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Lens Mount C mount Size L x W x H 29 3 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm without cylindric housing extension or connectors 48 2 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm with cylindric housing extension and connectors Weight lt 80g Conformity CE UL FCC GenlCam V 2 x including PFNC V 1 x and SFNC V 2 x IP30 RoHS USB3 Vision USB IF in preparation Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 5 General Specifications After initial camera start up a resolution of 1920 x 1200 pixels will be ava
100. 550 650 750 850 Wavelength nm Fig 6 acA1920 25um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 1 0 950 1050 0 8 0 6 0 4 Relative Response 0 2 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 Wavelength nm Fig 7 acA1920 155um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Basler ace USB 3 0 900 1000 1150 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 Quantum Efficiency 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wavelength nm Fig 8 acA2000 165um acA2040 90um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Quantum Efficiency 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wavelength nm Fig 9 acA2000 165umNIR acA2040 90umNIR Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 18 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Quantum Efficiency Fig Quantum Efficiency 70 60 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 50 40 30 20 10 350 450 550 650 750 850 950 Wavelength nm 10 acA2500 14um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 1050 1150 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 Wavelength nm Fig 11 acA3800 14um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Basler ace USB 3 0 1000 19 Specificat
101. 8 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware frame start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the camera for single frame acquisition mode with the trigger mode for the frame burst start trigger set to off We will use the timed exposure mode with input line Line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering In this example we will use a trigger delay Set the acquisition mode to single frame camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode SingleFrame Select the frame burst start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameBurstStart Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Select the frame start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger camera TriggerSource SetValu TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the trigger delay for one millisecond 1000us 1ms 0 001s camera TriggerDelay SetValue 1 78 Set for the t
102. 90u cameras Added an explanation about the pylon Viewer s significance for the camera configuration mechanism in Section 3 1 1 on page 44 Modified the descriptions of voltage requirements in Section 5 7 1 on page 57 Section 5 8 1 on page 60 Section 5 9 2 on page 65 and Section 5 9 3 on page 67 Added a note about the occurrence of a frame acquisition when enabling or disabling the inverter in Section 5 11 3 on page 79 and Section 5 12 5 on page 87 Added a note in Section 5 12 6 1 on page 88 about the triggering of Timer 1 in the absence of a flash window start signal Revised Section 5 13 on page 90 Added trigger sources for the frame start trigger in Section 6 4 1 2 on page 113 Added in Section 6 6 2 on page 132 a note about the unavailability of the flash window signal in ERS mode when very short exposure times are used Updated the maximum allowed gain settings for acA3800 14u and acA4600 10u cameras in Table 34 on page 196 Added Section 8 6 on page 214 describing the sequencer feature Added a section about the effective image ROI in Section 8 7 4 on page 247 Added a note about the unavailability of vertical and horizontal binning by 3 for acA3800 14um cameras in Section 8 7 1 on page 243 Added a note about checking ROI settings when changing a binning parameter value in Section 8 7 4 on page 247 Highlighted the distinction between active set and active user set in Section 8 17 on page 288 Added the Line Status
103. 90um 1 1 1 1 acA2040 90umNIR 1 1 1 1 acA2500 14um 64 32 22 16 acA2500 14uc 64 32 22 16 acA3800 14um 2748 1374 687 Table 38 Minimum ROI Height Settings when Vertical Binning is Disabled and Enabled Mono Cameras acA1920 25uc and acA2500 14uc Basler ace USB 3 0 211 Features AW00123404000 Table 39 indicates the minimum ROI width settings when horizontal binning is enabled mono cameras acA1920 25uc and acA2500 14uc Camera Model Minimum ROI Height Color Cameras No Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Binning Binning by 2 Binning by 3 Binning by 4 Enabled Enabled Enabled acA640 90um 1 1 1 1 acA640 120um 1 1 1 1 acA645 100um 1 1 1 1 acA1300 30um 1 1 1 1 acA1600 20um 1 1 1 1 acA1920 25um 64 32 22 16 acA1920 25uc 64 32 22 16 acA1920 155um 4 4 4 4 acA2000 165um 8 8 8 8 acA2000 165umNIR 8 8 8 8 acA2040 90um 8 8 8 8 acA2040 90umNIR 8 8 8 8 acA2500 14um 64 32 22 16 acA2500 14uc 64 32 22 16 acA3800 14um 3840 1920 960 Table 39 Minimum ROI Width Settings when Horizontal Binning is Disabled and Enabled Monochrome Cameras acA1920 25uc and acA2500 14uc You can set the Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to get the maximum allowed settings for the Width and Height parameters They also illu
104. A1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 or acA4600 10 camera Use the ERS mode rather than the global reset release shutter mode The ERS mode allows overlapping frame acquisition while the global reset release mode does not Overlapping frame acquisitions is however necessary for achieving the highest frame rates frequently make when they are working with exposure time They will often use a very long exposure time without realizing that this can severely limit the camera s maximum allowed frame rate As an example assume that your camera is set to use a 1 2 second exposure time In this case because each frame acquisition will take at least 1 2 second to be completed the camera will only be able to acquire a maximum of two frames per second Even if the camera s nominal maximum frame rate is for example 100 frames per second it will only be able to acquire two frames per second because the exposure time is set much higher than normal D An important thing to keep in mind is a common mistake new camera users For more information about Image ROI settings see Section 8 5 on page 207 For more information about the ERS mode see Section 6 6 2 on page 132 Basler ace USB 3 0 167 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 11 Use Case Descriptions and Diagrams The following pages contain a series of use case descriptions and diagrams The descriptions and diagrams are designed to illustrate how frame burst start triggerin
105. All chunk as Section 8 18 3 2 on page 297 310 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Index Numerics 6 pin connector seeesesses 52 A acquisition frame rate see maximum allowed frame rate 165 acquisition mode 97 101 continuous frame sse 98 single frame sseessssess 97 acquisition start ssssss 97 101 acquisition status 98 101 103 111 acquisition stop ssssss 97 101 active SGL aee ete eges 215 288 active user set 288 AO see image region of interest area of interest see image region of interest asynchronous trigger source 221 auto function ROI relating to auto function 264 auto functions assignment to auto function ROI 264 explained eseeesses 261 modes of operation 262 region of interest ss 263 target value seseeee 261 using with binning 261 auto functions factory setup Lo eue Td 289 290 292 294 auto functions profile 274 B balance ratio essesessssss 183 balance white esssesessssse 182 automatic adjustment 275 balance ratio
106. Basler ace USER S MANUAL FOR USB 3 0 CAMERAS Document Number AW001234 Version 04 Language 000 English Release Date 17 June 2015 The manual includes information about the following prototype cameras acA645 100 acA1920 155 BASLER the power of sight For customers in the U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules For customers in Canada This apparatus complies with the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in Radio Interference Regulations Pour utilisateurs au Cana
107. Control You can use the Basler pylon API to set the Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter value from within your application software The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value camera ExposureOverlapTimeMax SetValue 3000 0 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about the electrical characteristics of camera output lines see Section 5 8 1 on page 60 and Section 5 9 3 1 on page 67 Frame Trigger Wait Signal Details acA1920 25um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc acA4600 10uc Only For cameras with a rolling shutter the rise of the Frame Trigger Wait signal is based on the minimum time required between the end of exposure of the first line in a frame and the start of exposure for the first line in the following frame This functionality is illustrated in Figure 75 If you are operating a camera with a rolling shutter you can avoid overtriggering by always making sure that the Frame Trigger Wait signal is high before you trigger the start of frame capture when they are triggered internally free run i e when Trigger Mode is set to Off acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 cameras allow overlapped frame acquisition only for the Frame Burst Start trigger and for the Frame Start Trigger Basler ace USB 3 0 159 Image Acquisitio
108. Data Sheet Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Relative Response Fig 2 Relative Response 0 9 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 0 8 0 7 0 6 d 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Wavelength nm 700 900 acA640 120um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 1 0 0 9 1000 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Wavelength nm 700 800 900 Fig 3 acA645 100um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Basler ace USB 3 0 1000 15 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Relative Response 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Wavelength nm 700 800 900 Fig 4 acA1300 30um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Relative Response 1 0 0 9 1000 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Wavelength nm 700 800 900 Fig 5 acA1600 20um Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 16 1000 AW00123404000 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 70 60 50 40 30 Quantum Efficiency 20 350 450
109. Delay 4 E gt a Frame Frame N Transmission to Host PC Frame N 1 Transmission to Host PC Transmission Timing charts are not drawn to scale Fig 76 Exposure Start Controlled with an ExFSTrig Signal Basler ace USB 3 0 163 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Note that you may have to add additional delays to the exposure start delay If you use a hardware signal to trigger image acquisition you must add a delay due to the input line response time for input line Line 1 or the GPIO lines Line 3 Line 4 if configured for input Note that such delays are associated with the frame burst start trigger signal and the frame start trigger signal If you use the debouncer feature you must add the delay due to the debouncer setting For more information about the debouncer feature see Section 5 11 2 on page 77 If you have set a frame start trigger delay you must add the set delay For more information about the frame start trigger delay see Section 6 4 3 3 on page 125 For example assume that you are using an acA640 120 camera and that you have set the camera for hardware triggering Also assume that you have selected input line Line 1 to accept the hardware trigger signal that the input line response time is 1 5 us that the delay due to the debouncer setting for input line Line 1 is 5 us and that you set the frame start trigger delay to 200 us In this case Total Start Delay Exposure Start Delay Table 31
110. Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter see Section 6 8 4 on page 153 Example Let s assume you are operating an acA2000 165 camera at a device link throughput value of 250 MByte s the camera is set for rising edge triggering and you want to use am exposure time of 100 us Under these conditions 32 us of exposure time see Table 22 will be added automatically to the exposure time that is controlled by the ExFSTrig signal To achieve the wanted exposure time of 100 us you would therefore keep the ExFSTrig signal high for 68 us 100 us 32 us Subsequently the camera would add automatically 32 us giving a total of 100 us exposure time which is the wanted exposure time 124 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 4 8 8 Frame Start Trigger Delay The frame start trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware frame start trigger and when the trigger will become effective The frame start trigger delay can be specified in the range from 0 to 1000000 us equivalent to 1 s When the delay is set to 0 us no delay will be applied To set the frame start trigger delay Set the camera s Trigger Selector parameter to frame start Set the value of the Trigger Delay parameter The frame start trigger delay will not operate if the Frame Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to off or if you are using a software frame start trigger 6 4
111. Indicates line status for Line 1 input Indicates line status for Line 2 output Indicates line status for Line 3 GPIO pe e Indicates line status for Line 4 GPIO s m Reserved Fig 48 Bit Field of the LineStatusAll Parameter Bit numbers and Assignment of I O Lines 94 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface See Section 5 13 1 on page 90 for details about the relation between line status and its determining factors e g electrical signal level line inverter setting and user output setting For information about checking and setting the status of output lines see Section 5 12 3 on page 84 and Section 5 12 4 on page 85 To check the status of all I O lines with a single operation using the pylon API 1 Read the value of the LineStatusAll parameter to determine the current status of all I O lines You can read the Line Status All parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read the parameter value Getting informed about the line status of all I O lines int64 t i camera LineStatusAll GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 5 14 2 Checking the Status of an Individual I O Line The following example illustrates checking the line status of output line Line 2
112. Input Line Response time Debouncer Setting Frame Start Trigger Delay Total Start Delay 18 us 1 5 us 5 us 200 us 224 5 us You can determine the sensor readout time by reading the value of the Sensor Readout Time parameter The parameter indicates what the readout time will be in microseconds given the camera s current settings You can read the Sensor Readout Time parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to get the parameter value double d camera SensorReadoutTime GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily get the parameter value For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 164 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 10 Maximum Allowed Frame Rate In general the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate on any ace USB 3 0 camera can be limited by these factors The exposure time for the acquisition of frames If you use very long exposure times you can acquire fewer frames per second The amount of time it takes to read an acquired frame out of the imaging sensor and to prepare it for transmission out of the camera The amount of time varies with the height of the frame Frames with a smaller height take less time The frame height is determined by the camera s ROI Height setting The amount of time it takes to transmit
113. LineSelector Line2 camera LineSource SetValue LineSource FrameBurstTriggerWait You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about changing the selection of an output signal as the source signal for an output line see Section 5 12 1 on page 80 For more information about the electrical characteristics of camera output lines see Section 5 8 1 on page 60 and Section 5 9 3 1 on page 67 6 8 4 2 The Frame Trigger Wait Signal Overview As you are acquiring frames the camera automatically monitors the frame start trigger status and supplies a signal that indicates the current status The Frame Trigger Wait signal will go high whenever the camera enters a waiting for frame start trigger status The signal will go low when an external frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal is applied to the camera and the camera exits the waiting for frame start trigger status The signal will go high again when the camera again enters a waiting for frame trigger status and it is safe to apply the next frame start trigger signal If you base your use of the ExFSTrig signal on the state of the frame trigger wait signal you can avoid frame start overtriggering i e applying a frame start trigger signal to the camera when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status If you do ap
114. Loo Trig Signal REZA QO PESES SS Frame Acquisition Exo Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exo Readout Time KOO ie in a waiti 50x Camera is in a waiting for seret frame burst start trigger status Fig 71 Frame Burst Trigger Wait Signal The frame burst trigger wait signal will only be available when hardware frame burst start triggering is enabled For more information about event notification see Section 8 13 on page 277 154 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Selecting the Frame Burst Trigger Wait Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The frame burst trigger wait signal can be selected to act as the source signal for a camera output line e g line Line 2 Selecting a source signal for an output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select the output line e g Line 2 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the frame burst trigger wait signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value camera LineSelector SetValue
115. Production spread Unknown IO Aging optocouplers Unknown External I O supply voltage Depends on application but must be within specified ranges see Section 5 7 through Section 5 9 Load resistance Depends on application Load current Depends on application but must be within specified ranges see Section 5 7 through Section 5 9 Table 15 Factors Influencing Camera I O Propagation Delays major influence 9 minor influence Basler ace USB 3 0 73 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 10 3 Measured Propagation Delays The measured propagation delays reported in this section see Table 16 and Table 17 are likely to be near minimum values related to slow edges The measured propagation delays were derived from a camera production lot of 2000 cameras and are only valid for the specific camera operating conditions listed below No inferences can be made for propagation delays resulting from different operating conditions Specific operating conditions Housing temperature 25 C Load resistance R 170 Q I O supply voltage Us 5 VDC Propagation Delays for Inputs Fast Edge Slow Edge Opto isolated input 4 5 7 5 us rising edge 19 28 us falling edge Direct coupled GPIO IN lt 0 5 us falling edge lt 1us rising edge Table 16 Propagation Delays for the Camera Inputs 25 C Ry 170 Q Us 5 VDC Propagation Delays for Outp
116. Section 5 10 on page 69 162 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Camera Model Exposure Start Delay acA640 90 um uc 22 us acA640 120um uc 18 us acA645 100um uc 26 us acA1300 30um uc 35 us acA1600 20um uc 46 us acA1920 25um uc 35 us acA1920 155um uc 17 us for 8 bit pixel formats 21 us for 12 bit pixel formats acA2000 165um uc 0 9 us to 20 3 us with frame acquisitions overlapped acA2000 165umNIR 0 9 us to 1 3 us with frame acquisitions not overlapped Note The shortest delays of each range apply when maximum bandwidth is available The delays increase acA2040 90umNIR as available bandwidth decreases acA2040 90um uc acA2500 14um uc 848 to 883 us with frame acquisitions overlapped 848 us with frame acquisitions not overlapped or in global reset release mode acA3800 14um uc 2970 us for mono cameras 2620 us for color cameras with frame acquisitions not overlapped or in global reset release mode acA4600 10uc 7855 us with frame acquisitions not overlapped or in global reset release mode Table 31 Exposure Start Delays FTWait Signal ExFSTrig Signal Exposure Start Delay Exposure Start Delay lt Exposure Exposure Exposure Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N 2 Exposure m Fi NS R g T Frame rame ensor Readout Frame N 1 Sensor Readout Readout p Transmission Start Delay p Transmission Start
117. The actual size will be equal to or smaller than the calculated maximum size A set of chunks chunks one through N is illustrated in Figure 112 The example assumes that the CRC Checksum chunk was enabled Chunk Chunk Chunk Chunk Chunk Chunk Chunk EU 1 04 3 4d 2 2 2 1 N Image data payload i ID Length Payload ID Length t ID Length i Length 32 bit 32 bit Length 32 bit 32 bit Length 32 bit 932 bit I Chunk 1 Chunk 2 Chunk N Actual payload size of the grab result e A Fig 112 Example of a Set of Chunks Related to One Image Acquisition Basler ace USB 3 0 303 Features AW00123404000 Parsing the Appended Chunks After the image data chunk and appended chunks were transferred to the PC the sequence of chunks must be parsed to retrieve the chunk data via a GenlCam node map If you use code written in C the appended data chunks are parsed automatically after the image data were written into the PCs memory For each set of chunks the decoding starts from the end of the last data chunk The chunk data can be accessed using the chunk data node map For more information about accessing chunk data see the documentation for the C API in the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference for C and the included Grab Chunklmage code sample If you use code written in C or C you must run the image data chunk and the appended chunks through the chunk
118. The gray values of adjacent pixels from 3 rows are combined As a consequence the signal to noise ratio will be decreased while the camera s response to light will be slightly increased We recommend using vertical binning by 2 or by 4 Basler ace USB 3 0 243 Features AW00123404000 With horizontal binning adjacent pixels from 2 columns 3 columns or a maximum of 4 columns are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel Figure 92 illustrates horizontal binning Horizontal Binning by 2 Horizontal Binning by 3 Horizontal Binning by 4 ni Coop L1 1 1 Ex Ez THE Joco Joco Bocoodco Booo HER Carl rrr Fig 92 Horizontal Binning on Monochrome Cameras You can combine vertical and horizontal binning This however can cause objects to appear distorted in the image For more information about possible image distortion due to combined vertical and horizontal binning see Section 8 7 4 on page 247 Vertical binning by 3 and horizontal binning by 3 are not available for acA3800 14um cameras 244 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Feature
119. This type of output is sometimes referred to as Y Mono 8 180 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement 7 2 Integrated IR Cut Filter All color camera models are equipped with an IR cut filter as standard equipment The filter is mounted in a filter holder located in the cylindric housing extension of the camera Monochrome cameras include a filter holder in the cylindric housing extension of the camera but the holder is not populated with an IR cut filter NOTICE On all cameras the lens thread length is limited All cameras mono and color are equipped with a plastic filter holder located in the cylindric housing extension of the camera The location of the filter holder limits the length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera If a lens with a very long thread length is used the filter holder or the lens mount will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate For more information about the location of the IR cut filter in the camera see Section 1 4 2 on page 29 Basler ace USB 3 0 181 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00123404000 7 3 Color Enhancement Features Due to the presence of a Bayer filter in the color cameras see Section 7 1 on page 177 the pixel values read out from the sensor reside in RGB color space And for each pixel the pixel value for only one color red green or blue will be available raw data The color enhancement features h
120. To check the status of an I O line 1 Use the Line Selector parameter to select for example the opto isolated output line Line 2 pin 4 2 Read the value of the Line Status parameter to determine the current status of the line True means the line s status is currently high and false means the line s status is currently low You can set the Line Selector and read the Line Status parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and read the parameter value Select output line Line 2 and read the status camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Line2 bool b camera LineStatus GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 95 Physical Interface 96 AW00123404000 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 Image Acquisition Control This section provides detailed information about controlling image acquisition You will find information about triggering image acquisition about setting the exposure time for image acquisition about controlling the camera s image acquisition rate and about how the camera s maximum allowed image acquisition rate can vary depending on the current camera settings input Line1 or outp
121. USB 3 0 port 2 9 W typical 3 2 W max 5 VDC I O Lines 1 opto isolated input line 1 opto isolated output line and 2 direct coupled GPIO lines power supplies must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Lens Mount C mount Size Lx W x H 29 3 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm without cylindric housing extension or connectors 48 2 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm with cylindric housing extension and connectors Weight lt 80g Conformity CE UL FCC GenlCam V 2 x including PFNC V 1 x and SFNC V 2 x IP30 RoHS USB3 Vision USB IF in preparation The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 6 General Specifications At full resolution and maximum bandwidth 10 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification acA2500 14 um uc at full resolution Sensor Size um 2592 x 1944 H x V pixels uc 2590 x 1942 Sensor Type Aptina MT9P031 Progressive scan CMOS Rolling shutter Optical Size 1 2 5 Effective Sensor Diagonal 7 2 mm Pixel Size H x V 2 2 um x 2 2 um Max Frame Rate 14 fos Mono Color Mono or color color models include a Bayer pattern RGB filter on the sensor Data Outp
122. a This results in a higher gray value output from the camera for a given amount of output from the imaging sensor Decreasing the gain decreases the slope of the response curve and results in a lower gray value for a given amount of sensor output Increasing the gain is useful when at your brightest exposure a gray value lower than 255 in modes that output 8 bits per pixel or 4095 in modes that output 12 bits per pixels is reached For example if you found that at your brightest exposure the gray values output by the camera were no higher than 127 in an 8 bit mode you could increase the Gray Values 4095 255 12 bit 8 bit 12d 6 dB 0 dB 0 25 50 100 Sensor Output Signal 96 Fig 84 Gain in dB gain to 6 dB an amplification factor of 2 and thus reach gray values of 254 D digital shift feature The analog gain feature is not available for the acA1920 25 acA3800 14 and acA 4600 10 cameras To obtain an effect similar to adjusting analog gain use the For more information about the digital shift feature see Section 8 4 on page 201 Basler ace USB 3 0 195 Features AW00123404000 8 1 1 D Setting the Gain This section Section 8 1 describes how gain can be adjusted manually i e by setting the value of the gain All parameter The camera also has a Gain Auto function that can automatically adjust the gain Manual adjustment of the gain All parameter will only work
123. a CounterEventSource SetValue CounterEventSource FrameStart Select reset by signal applied to input line 1 camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Linel Select reset by software camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Software Execute counter reset camera CounterReset Execute Disable reset camera CounterReset Source SetValue CounterResetSource Off You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about using line 1 as the source signal for a counter reset see Section 5 8 on page 60 and about using Line 3 and Line 4 see Section 5 9 3 on page 67 Basler ace USB 3 0 301 Features AW00123404000 8 18 3 6 CRC Checksum Chunk The CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check checksum chunk feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a CRC checksum calculated using the X modem method As shown in Figure 111 the checksum is calculated using all of the related image data and all of the appended chunks except for the CRC chunk itself If enabled the CRC checksum chunk is always the last chunk appended to the image data CRC checksum is calculated on this data Chunk 1 image data payload amp chunk ID amp length Fig 111 CRC Checksum To enable the CRC checksum chunk 1 Use the Chunk Selector to se
124. a frame burst start trigger signal has just been applied to the camera the camera will exit from the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Applying a frame start trigger signal to the camera at this point will exit the camera from the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status and will begin the process of exposing and reading out a frame see Figure 49 on page 99 As soon as the camera is ready to accept another frame start trigger signal it will return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status A new frame start trigger signal can then be applied to the camera to begin another frame exposure The frame start trigger has two modes off and on If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera The rate at which the camera will generate the signals and acquire frames will be determined by the way that you set several frame rate related parameters 98 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on you must trigger frame start by applying frame start trigger signals to the camera Each time a trigger signal is applied the camera will begin a frame exposure When frame start is bei
125. about overlapped operation see Section 6 7 on page 142 Basler ace USB 3 0 165 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Factory parameter settings for acA2000 165u and acA2040 90u cameras will initially cause them to operate at less than their maximum specified frame rates acA2000 165u approximately 90 fps acA2040 90u approximately 50 fps The factory parameter settings were chosen to avoid problems that might result from insufficient USB 3 0 bandwidth available in your application You can easily change the parameter settings to operate the cameras at the maximum specified frame rates when sufficient USB 3 0 bandwidth is available 6 10 1 Using Basler pylon to Check the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate You can use the Basler pylon API to read the current value of the Resulting Frame Rate parameter from within your application software using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to get the parameter value Get the resulting frame rate double d camera ResultingFrameRate GetValue The Resulting Frame Rate parameter takes all camera settings that can influence the frame rate into account and indicates the maximum allowed frame rate given the current settings You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily read the parameter For more information about the pylon API and pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 166 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW0012340
126. age 195 For more information about the auto function profile feature see Section 8 12 6 on page 274 The limits within which the camera will adjust the gain All parameter are defined by the Auto Gain Upper Limit and the Auto Gain Lower Limit parameters The minimum and maximum allowed settings for the Auto Gain Upper Limit and Auto Gain Lower Limit parameters depend on the current pixel data format on the current settings for binning and on whether or not the parameter limits for manually setting the gain feature are disabled The Auto Target Brightness parameter defines the target average gray value that the gain auto function will attempt to achieve when it is automatically adjusting the gain All value The target average gray value can range from 0 black to 255 white when the camera is set for an 8 bit pixel format or from 0 black to 4095 white when the camera is set for a 12 bit pixel format To set the gain auto function using Basler pylon Select the Auto Function ROI for example ROI1 Set the value of the Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameters for the ROI Set the Gain Selector to All Set the value of the Auto Gain Lower Limit and Auto Gain Upper Limit parameters Set the value of the Auto Target Brightness parameter ou PrwWN Set the value of the Gain Auto parameter for the once or the continuous mode of operation You can set the gain auto function from within your application software by using the pylo
127. al decimation the ROI height can be smaller than the maximum possible height determined by the pixel resolution in vertical direction D If you use the decimation vertical feature and you reset the decimation vertical In this case you can manually set the ROI height back to the maximum possible height Basler ace USB 3 0 251 Features AW00123404000 8 9 Mirror Image The mirror image features are not available for the acA1920 155 cameras 8 9 1 Reverse X The reverse X feature is a horizontal mirror image feature When the reverse X feature is enabled the pixel values for each line in a captured image will be swapped end for end about the line s center This means that for each line the value of the first pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the last pixel the value of the second pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the next to last pixel and so on Figure 100 shows a normal image on the left and an image captured with reverse X enabled on the right Normal Image Mirror Image Hees Ro ae he am e WE 6000000000000900 xm epe AEUTT ep rrr od T gg Fig 100 Reverse X Mirror Imaging Using ROls with Reverse X You can use the ROI feature when using the reverse X feature Note however that the position of an ROI relative to the sensor remains the same regardless of whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled see Figure 101 As acon
128. al is received sequencer set 0 is automatically loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 0 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is also found to be 1 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 0 has already reached its maximum and must start again with the next frame acquisition When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 1 is loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera Sequencer set 1 was loaded because the Counter 2 count for sequencer set 0 was found to already have reached its maximum allowed value in the preceding frame acquisition The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 1 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is also found to be 1 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 1 has already reached its maximum and must start again with the next frame acquisition When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 2 is loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera Sequencer set 2 was loaded becaus
129. ame Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on you must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera each time you want to begin a frame acquisition The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal that will act as the frame start trigger signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera by executing a Trigger Software command for the frame start trigger on the host PC Software Signal 1 Software Signal 2 Software Signal 3 the latter is not available on acA1920 155 cameras Specific software commands analogous to the Software command Line 1 When the source signal is set to Line 1 you apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line Line 1 on the camera Line 3 Analogous to the Line 1 source signal However the GPIO line Line 3 must be configured for input Line 4 Analogous to the Line 3 source signal If the Trigger Source parameter is set to Line 1 Line 3 or Line 4 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame start trigger Falling
130. amera and it will ensure that the desired areas on the object are imaged Transmitting images of the space between the objects would be a waste of bandwidth and processing them would be a waste of processor resources 174 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Settings Use Case Frame Burst Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger On The frame burst start trigger is on and the frame burst start trigger source is set to software The user must execute a frame burst start trigger software command to make the camera exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status Because the acquisition burst frame count is set to 3 the camera will re enter the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status after 3 frame start trigger signals have been applied The frame start trigger is on and the frame start trigger source is set to input line Line 1 The user must apply a frame start trigger signal to input line Line 1 to start each frame exposure Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the frame burst start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame burst start trigger Software Acquisition Burst Frame Count 3 Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge atrigger signal applied by the user EZES camera is waiting for a frame burst start t
131. amera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout frame transmission Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed Frame Burst Start Tm i Li Li LI Li Li Tigger Signal 2 Ja naiai eee Bee ee ee eee eee dem m omms 20 BA A BA AA BA cu Frame Start Trigger Signal applied to Line 1 Y Y Yy y Yy y y Fig 78 Use Case 2 Frame Burst Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger On Basler ace USB 3 0 171 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Use Case 3 Frame Burst Start Trigger On Frame Start Trigger Off Use case three is illustrated on page 173 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off Because the frame burst start trigger mode is set to on the user must apply a frame burst start trigger signal to the camera In this case we have set the frame burst start trigger signal source to input line Line 1 and the activation to rising edge so an externally generated electrical signal applied to Line 1 will serve as the frame burst start trigger signal The Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter has been set to 3 When a rising edge of the electrical signal is applied to Line 1 the camera will exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame sta
132. ameras only binning For more information about color binning see Section 8 7 2 on page 245 Binning increases the camera s response to light by summing the charges from adjacent pixels into one pixel Two types of binning are available vertical binning and horizontal binning With vertical binning adjacent pixels from 2 rows 3 rows or a maximum of 4 rows in the imaging sensor array are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel Figure 91 illustrates vertical binning Vertical Binning by 2 Vertical Binning by 3 Vertical Binning by 4 all m ppEpePER PEOEBREER J i Jirrrrrrr LL Ir ES rt LL Lr D1 ra rt jose ee A jes RE ee D I O Ca 7 Fig 91 Vertical Binning on Monochrome Cameras For the acA1920 25um and acA2500 14 vertical binning works in a different way Vertical binning by 2 and by 4 The gray values of adjacent pixels from 2 rows or from 4 rows are averaged As a consequence the signal to noise ratio will be increased while the camera s response to light will not be increased Vertical binning by 3
133. an output line 1 Use the Line Selector to select for example Line 2 2 Set the value of the Line Inverter parameter to true to enable inversion on the selected line or to false to disable inversion You can set the Line Selector and the Line Inverter parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Enable the line inverter on output line Line 2 camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Line2 camera LineInverter SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 87 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 12 6 Working With the Timer Output Signal As mentioned in Section 5 12 1 on page 80 the source signal for an output line can be set to Timer 1 Active The camera has one timer designated as Timer 1 When you set the source signal for the output line to Timer 1 Active Timer 1 will be used to supply the signal to the output line Timer 1 operates as follows A trigger source event occurs that starts the timer A delay period begins to expire When the delay expires the timer signal goes high and a duration period begins to expire When the duration period expires the timer signal goes low Duration t Delay
134. ansmit pixel data from within the region defined by your settings Information from the pixels outside of the region of interest is discarded Column 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Row 0 1 L Offset Y 4 L A 6 7 EEE 8 El 9 El H Height 1 EEEE 11 BH 12 E H I 13 14 m E The camera will only 15 transmit the 16 pixel data 17 from this 18 region 19 r Lr 1r 1I Ji I LI LO pu a Width Fig 85 Region of Interest One of the main advantages of the image ROI feature is that decreasing the height of the ROI can increase the camera s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate For more information about how changing the ROI height affects the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 6 10 on page 165 Basler ace USB 3 0 207 Features AW00123404000 centering is disabled If you want to set offset Y make sure the Center Y feature for automatic ROI centering is disabled For more information about automatic ROI centering and the effects on Center X and Center Y settings see Section 8 5 1 on page 213 D
135. anual adjustment of the Balance Ratio parameters for red green and blue will only work if the Balance White Auto function is disabled For more information about auto functions in general see Section 8 12 on page 261 For more information about the Balance White Auto function see Section 8 12 7 on page 275 When you set the Light Source Preset to match your light source characteristics and or make changes to the entries in the color transformation matrix the camera will automatically make adjustments to the white balance settings so that they are best suited for the current settings For more information about using the color transformation matrix see Section 7 3 4 on page 191 With the white balancing scheme used on the cameras the red intensity green intensity and blue intensity can be individually adjusted For each color a Balance Ratio parameter is used to set the intensity of the color If the Balance Ratio parameter for a color is set to a value of 1 the intensity of the color will be unaffected by the white balance mechanism If the ratio is set to a value lower than 1 the intensity of the color will be reduced If the ratio is set to a value greater than 1 the intensity of the color will be increased The increase or decrease in intensity is proportional For example if the Balance Ratio for a color is set to 1 25 the intensity of that color will be increased by 25 The Balance Ratio parameter value can
136. arget brightness and particularly so for gain should be as low as possible Adjust the white balance Make sure a white or light gray object is imaged while white balance is carried out An easy way to set the white balance is to use the once function on the camera s balance white auto feature Set the gamma value if necessary When gamma is set correctly there should be a smooth transition from the lightest to the darkest gray scale targets on your color chart or on a gray scale If the camera is set to light source preset parameter value Daylight5000K default Daylight6500K or Tungsten2800K the camera will provide gamma encoded images according to sRGB that should be displayed on the monitor with great color fidelity Accordingly there should be little need to change the default setting of one for the gamma parameter If the camera is set to the light source preset parameter value Off the camera will provide images without gamma encoding In this case we recommend setting the gamma parameter value to 0 41667 Examine the colors and see if they are satisfactory at this point If not chose a different setting for the Light Source Preset parameter Try each mode and determine which one gives you the best color results Basler ace USB 3 0 193 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00123404000 8 The color fidelity should now be quite good If you want to make additional changes adjust the hue and saturation by
137. arranty becomes void 3 3 to 24 VDC Safe operating direct coupled GPIO output supply voltage range lt 3 3 VDC The direct coupled GPIO output can operate erratically Table 14 Voltage Requirements for a Direct coupled GPIO Line Set as an Output The following applies to a direct coupled GPIO line when it s set as an output The camera uses an open collector with only a weak internal pull up resistor approximately 2 kQ It is therefore likely that many applications will have to provide an additional pull up resistor When the direct coupled GPIO line is in the on state the residual voltage will typically be approximately 0 4 V at 50 mA and 25 C housing temperature The actual residual voltage however depends on camera operating temperature load current and production spread Basler ace USB 3 0 67 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 Currents The leakage current in the off state should usually not exceed approximately 60 uA and will typically be much lower e g approximately 4 A at 25 C 77 F housing temperature The actual leakage current depends on camera operating temperature and production spread of electronic components The maximum load current allowed through the output circuit is 50 mA There is no specific minimum load current but you need to consider several facts the leakage current will have stronger effect when load currents are low the propagation delay of the output increases as
138. art trigger signal was received the trigger signal assigned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer Basler ace USB 3 0 231 Features AW00123404000 232 set that is sequencer set 2 into the active set The parameter values for sequencer set 2 overwrite the parameter values for sequencer set 1in the active set A frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 2 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 stays high When the next frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal assigned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer set that is sequencer set 3 into the active set The parameter values for sequencer set 3 overwrite the parameter values for sequencer set 2 in the active set Note by comparison with previous frame start triggers that signal levels of the sequencer set trigger assigned to path 1 that occur occur between frame start triggers have no effect on sequencer set advance An image acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 3 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes low The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes high When the next frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal
139. asler pylon IP Configurator The Basler pylon SDK and source code samples A programming guide and API reference The pylon software includes several tools that you can use to change the parameters on your camera including the pylon Viewer the pylon USB Configurator and the pylon SDK The remaining sections in this chapter provide an introduction to the tools 3 1 1 The pylon Viewer The pylon Viewer is included in the Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite The pylon Viewer is a standalone application that lets you view and change most of the camera s parameter settings via a GUl based interface All parameters and parameter values displayed by the pylon Viewer are loaded from the camera into the pylon Viewer The parameters and values do not reside within the pylon Viewer And when you change a parameter value the change will occur in the camera The pylon Viewer also lets you acquire images display them and save them Using the pylon Viewer is a very convenient way to get your camera up and running quickly when you are doing your initial camera evaluation or doing a camera design in for a new project For more information about using the pylon Viewer see the nstallation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with the Basler pylon Camera Software Suite AW000611 3 1 2 The pylon USB Configurator The pylon USB Configurator is included in the Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite besides the Basler pylon IP Configurator and the Basler pylon Ca
140. ata format see pixel format pixel format ese ans 179 Bay9t iii eee 179 ImOrio de es 180 XU each cae ad 180 port pin assignments ssssse 53 pin numbering eee 53 USB3 Micro B eeeees 53 power see camera power power and I O cable voltage requirements 65 67 power supply LPS aas 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 37 41 55 57 60 63 SEEMV eis 2 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 xs redet rt segun 37 41 55 57 60 63 preset see light source preset primary color eeeeeeeeeee 186 propagation delay 69 162 pull up resistor eeeesseeeeees 92 pylon APIS ia IAEA eG 45 Camera Software Suite 43 SDK une etes 45 USB Configurator 43 306 SUCI eirean he asado aa aiaa aE 43 R reduced resolution 247 250 region of interest auto function ROI 263 see image region of interest remove limits parameter 200 223 314 AW001 23404000 removing parameter limits 200 response time see propagation delay reverse X seessssssssseeeeee 252 254 sitne 182 ROI see image region of interest ROI centering ssssss 213 enter X iei e e eds 213 Center Yu es ue E E 213 rolling shutter mode 132
141. ations When Using Binning 0 cee ee eee 247 Decimation Vertical acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 Only 004 249 8 8 1 Considerations When Using Decimation 00000085 250 Mirror Image o S mex e a ete eee ea oe ea ba eee 252 8 9 1 Reverse X ocio s da sedge bed ake eee UE REESE a 252 8 9 2 Reverse Y acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 Only 0008 254 Luminance Lookup Table ssssllessesle elle 256 Gamma Gorrectlon c saei colAd E REN RLALLER UI edd EE RR RUE 259 Auto FUNCIONS toe CE EYU ERES UIDI Pee eee READY 261 8 12 1 Common Characteristics llle 261 8 12 2 Auto Function Operating Modes 0 cee ee 262 8 12 3 Auto Function ROIs gessie aaia aha aieiaa e aa eee 263 8 12 3 1 Assignment of an Auto Function to an Auto Function ROI 264 8 12 3 2 Positioning of an Auto Function ROI Relative to the Image ROI 265 8 12 3 3 Setting an Auto Function ROI asa aa uaaa aanne 267 8 124 Gal AUTO Se s sr REEL eee eee ae UR xS dU Seeks 269 8 12 5 Exposure AUtO nae ord Vie elena EE c HN e in seeders 271 8 12 6 Auto Function Profile liliis 274 8 12 7 Balance White Auto liliis 275 8 12 8 Using an Auto Function liliis eere 276 Event Notification vui ve ERE E MEHPTUETCRINUMRECSSUIGE XY 277 TestImageS APUL PPP 280 8 14 1 Test Image Descriptions naaa 281 Device Information Parameters l l 284 User Defined Valu
142. below and that the camera has received an external frame start trigger when the camera is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status In this case 1 A Frame Start Overtrigger event is created The event contains the event in the strict sense plus supplementary information An Event Type Identifier In this case the identifier would show that a frame start overtrigger type event has occurred A Timestamp This is a timestamp indicating when the event occurred The time stamp timer starts running at power off on or at camera reset The unit for the timer is ticks where one tick 1 ns The timestamp is a 64 bit value 2 The event is placed in an internal queue in the camera Basler ace USB 3 0 277 Features AW00123404000 3 As soon as transmission time is available an event message for the currently earliest event in the internal queue will be sent to the PC a After the camera sends an event message it waits for an acknowledgement If no acknowledgement is received within a specified timeout the camera will resend the event message If an acknowledgement is still not received the timeout and resend mechanism will repeat until a specified maximum number of retries is reached If the maximum number of retries is reached and no acknowledge has been received the message will be dropped While the camera is waiting for an acknowledgement no new event messages can be transmitted 4 Event notification inv
143. bit bit bt bit effective depth by default the camera transmits the 12 bits that are output from the ADC ADC No Shift B Shift by 1 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the output from the camera will include bit 10 through bit 0 from the AD ADC along with a zero as an LSB S bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting once is that the output of the 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 camera is effectively multiplied by 2 For example assume that the camera is set for no shift that it is M viewing a uniform white target and that under these S conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 100 If you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1 the reading would increase to 200 Ls wr Shifted Once When the camera is set to shift by 1 the least significant bit output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that no odd gray values can be output and that the gray value scale will Basler ace USB 3 0 201 Features AW00123404000 only include values of 2 4 6 8 10 and so on This absence of some gray values is commonly referred to as missing codes If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 1 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 1 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel
144. c 525 us 525 us 525 us acA3800 14uc 3561 us 4461 us 4101 us acA4600 10uc 4521 us 5439 us 4980 us Table 27 Exposure Overhead Time for Color Cameras Basler ace USB 3 0 133 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Frame Start Triggered Total Readout Time i Sensor Readout Time Line 1 Line 2 p Line3 XN Lne4 Line5 E Line 6 EE Line 7 Um Line 8 EU Line 9 EU Line 10 UE Line 11 n e tRow e Line N 2 a Line N 1 UE Line N C N Reset Runtime lt gt Cy Total Runtime line exposure W line readout Fig 58 Rolling Shutter in the ERS Mode You can calculate the reset runtime using this formula Reset Runtime tRow x ROI Height 1 You can calculate the total readout time using this formula Total Readout Time tRow x ROI Height C4 us You can calculate the total runtime using this formula Total Runtime Exposure Time Parameter Setting Total Readout Time The cameras except the acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 cameras can provide an exposure active output signal that will go high when the exposure time for line one begins and will go low when the exposure time for line one ends If the camera is operating with the rolling shutter in ERS mode and you are using the camera to capture images of moving objects the use of flash lighting is most s
145. cally adjust the exposure time Manual adjustment of the exposure time parameter will only work correctly if the Exposure Auto function is disabled For more information about auto functions in general see Section 8 12 on page 261 For more information about the Exposure Auto function in particular see Section 8 12 5 on page 271 D This section Section 6 5 describes how the exposure time can be adjusted 6 5 1 Exposure Times for All Models Except the acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 The section presents the minimum and maximum parameter values for the Exposure Time parameter Table 23 All camera models are included except the acA2000 165um umNIR uc and acA2040 90um umNIR uc cameras that are considered in Section 6 5 2 Camera Model Exposure Times us Minimum Allowed Maximum Possible Increment acA640 90um uc 17 10000000 1 acA640 120um uc 4 10000000 1 acA645 100um uc 20 10000000 1 acA1300 30um uc 16 10000000 1 acA1600 20um uc 25 10000000 1 acA1920 25um uc 35 9999990 35 acA1920 155um uc 34 10000000 1 acA2500 14um uc 35 9999990 35 acA3800 14um uc 35 1600000 1 acA4600 10uc 35 1460000 1 Table 23 Minimum Allowed Exposure Time Settings Maximum Possible Exposure Time Settings and Increments Basler ace USB 3 0 127 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 5 2 Exposure Times for the acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 The section presents the minimum allowed and maximum poss
146. camera power must meet the Limited Power Source LPS requirements A suitable power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order a power supply If you use a powered hub as part of the USB 3 0 connection the powered hub must meet the LPS requirements Basler ace USB 3 0 55 Physical Interface AW00123404000 NOTICE Voltage outside of the specified range can cause damage The camera s nominal operating voltage is 5 VDC effective at the camera s USB 3 0 port You must supply camera power in accord with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification and involve a power supply that meets the Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and Limited Power Source LPS requirements Power consumption is as shown in the specification tables in Section 1 of this manual 56 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 7 Opto isolated Input Pin 2 Line 1 The camera is equipped with one dedicated opto isolated input line designated as Line 1 The input line is accessed via the 6 pin connector on the back of the camera pin 2 see Figure 34 In addition the camera has two direct coupled GPIO lines Line 3 and Line 4 that can both be used as input lines They are described in Section 5 9 on page 63 against EMI than a GPIO line used as an input However when using the opto The opto isolated input line has the advantage of being distinctly more robust isolated input line the d
147. cation and for more information about accessories available from Basler and about purchasing go to the Basler website www baslerweb com D Restricting factory parameter settings for acA2000 165u and acA2040 90u cameras will initially prevent them from operating at their maximum specified frame rates This was chosen to avoid problems that might result from insufficient available USB 3 0 bandwidth made available by your application The following initial factory set maximum frame rates apply acA2000 165u approximately 90 fps acA2040 90u approximately 50 fps You can easily increase the camera parameter settings and operate the cameras atthe maximum specified frame rates if sufficient USB 3 0 bandwidth is available 42 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Camera Drivers and Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 3 Camera Drivers and Tools for Changing Camera Parameters This chapter provides an overview of the camera drivers and the options available for changing the camera s parameters The camera requires the Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite or a higher version The options available with the Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite let you change parameters and control the camera by using a stand alone GUI known as the Basler pylon Viewer or by accessing the camera from within your software application using the Basler pylon API In addition the pylon USB Configurator allows you to obtain information about the ar
148. ce lookup table described above Use the LUT Index parameter to select a value in the lookup table The LUT Index parameter selects the value in the table to change The index number for the first value in the table is 0 for the second value in the table is 1 for the third value in the table is 2 and so on Use the LUT Value parameter to set the selected value in the lookup table Use the LUT Index parameter and LUT value parameters to set other table values as desired Use the LUT Enable parameter to enable the table You can set the LUT Selector the LUT Index parameter and the LUT Value parameter from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter values Select the lookup table camera LUTSelector SetValue LUTSelector Luminance Write a lookup table to the device The following lookup table causes an inversion of the sensor values bright gt dark dark gt bright for int i 0 i lt 4096 i 8 camera LUTIndex SetValue i camera LUTValue SetValue 4095 i Enable the lookup table camera LUTEnable SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 258 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 11 Gamma Correct
149. chitecture of the device tree to which your camera is connected and about the devices including your camera You can obtain the Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite from our website by using this link www baslerweb com To help you install the software you can also download the Quick Installation Guide for USB 3 0 Cameras AW001235 from the website 3 1 The Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite The Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite is available for Windows and Linux operating systems and is designed to operate all Basler cameras that have an IEEE 1394 interface a GigE interface or a USB 3 0 interface It will also operate some newer Basler camera models with a Camera Link interface The pylon drivers offer reliable real time image data transport into the memory of your PC at a very low CPU load Basler ace USB 3 0 43 Camera Drivers and Tools for Changing Camera Parameters AW00123404000 The Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite includes these software features The Basler pylon USB3 Vision driver and the pylon USB Configurator The Basler GigE Vision network drivers filter driver and performance driver The Basler pylon IEEE 1394a b drivers The Basler pylon Camera Link driver for some newer camera models and the Basler pylon Camera Link Configurator A Basler pylon camera API for use with a variety of programming languages The Basler pylon DirectShow driver The Basler pylon TWAIN driver The Basler pylon Viewer and the B
150. cimation Vertical parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Enable Vertical Decimation by 2 camera DecimationVertical SetValue 2 Disable Vertical Decimation camera DecimationVertical SetValue 1 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 8 8 1 Considerations When Using Decimation Reduced Vertical Resolution Using vertical decimation effectively reduces the vertical resolution of the camera s imaging sensor For example the sensor in the acA2000 165um camera has a maximum resolution of 2048 H x 1088 V If you set this camera to use vertical decimation by 5 the effective resolution of the sensor is reduced to 2048 H by 217 V If you reduce the vertical resolution by using the vertical decimation feature you can increase the frame rate of the camera Image Distortion The imaged objects will appear shrunk in vertical direction due to vertical decimation while no modification will occur in horizontal direction Accordingly the image will be distorted If for example vertical decimation is set to 2 the imaged objects will appear shrunk by a factor of 2 compared to the horizontal direction and compared to an image without decimation Binning and Ver
151. ctor SetValue UserDefinedValueSelector Valuel camera UserDefinedValue SetValue 1000 Get the value of user defined Value 1 camera UserDefinedValueSelector SetValue UserDefinedValueSelector Valuel int64 t i camera UserDefinedValue GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the Basler pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 287 Features AW00123404000 8 17 User Sets A user set is a group of parameter values with all the settings needed to control the camera eae MON Flash RAM There are three basic types of user sets a selection of user sets User Set 1 some that can be configured by the user and User Set 2 some with factory setups that can not be changed the user set configured as the default user set default the active user set User Set Default Active User Set 1 The Active User Set ea Default User Set The active user set contains most of the camera s current parameter settings and is part of the active set The active set contains all of the camera s current parameter settings and thus determines the camera s User Set performance and therefore what your image currently User Set looks like When you change parameter settings using the pylon API or the pylon Viewer you are making Fig 110 User
152. currently active counter event source So far only Counter 1 is implemented as counter and the Frame Start trigger as counter event source The Counter 1 value is a 32 bit number The counter starts at 0 and increments by 1 for each frame start trigger The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset before see below After reaching the maximum value the counter will reset to 0 and then continue counting Be aware that if the camera is acquiring frame start triggers continuously and continuous capture is stopped several numbers in the counting sequence can be skipped This happens due to the internal buffering scheme of image data used in the camera To enable the counter value chunk 1 Use the chunk selector to select the counter value chunk 2 Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the counter value chunk is enabled and Chunk Mode Active is enabled the camera will add a counter value chunk to each acquired image After an image with an appended chunk has been received by your PC the chunk must be retrieved For information about retrieving data chunks see Section 8 18 4 on page 303 You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to activate the chunk mode and enable the counter value chunk make chunk mode active and enable Counter Value chunk
153. d Applies Always Not Only in this Example Use Case Three in Overview Use case three demonstrates the use of software commands for completely asynchronous control of cycling through the available four sequencer sets and of cycling reset Software Signal 1 is the trigger source for path 0 reset Software Signal 3 is the trigger source for path 1 advance The triggering is asynchronous to the frame start triggers In addition delays of arbitrary duration are involved between issuing a trigger and it becoming effective Accordingly the resulting sequencer operation is characterized by some degree of chance Basler ace USB 3 0 239 Features AW00123404000 Use Case Three in Detail Assuming that the sequencer sets are configured according to Table 43 on page 239 and the camera is not acquiring images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the Sequencer Mode parameter value is set to On the sequencer feature becomes enabled for the application of sequencer sets during image acquisitions The transitional dummy sequencer set with index number 1 is loaded into the active set overwriting the previous sequencer parameter values Section 8 6 2 on page 215 When a frame start trigger signal is received sequencer set 0 is automatically loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera When the next frame start trigger signal was received seque
154. d and blue pixels match the average value for the green pixels Either Auto Function ROI can be selected to work with the balance white auto function If the selected Auto Function ROI does not overlap the Image ROI see the Auto Function ROI section the pixel data from the Auto Function ROI will not be used to control the white balance of the image However as soon as the Balance White Auto function is set to once operation mode the Balance Ratio parameter values for red green and blue are each set to 1 5 These settings will control the white balance of the image For more information about setting the white balance manually see Section 7 2 on page 181 To set the balance white function using Basler pylon Select the Auto Function ROI for example ROI 2 2 Setthe value of the Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameters for the ROI 3 Set the value of the Exposure Auto parameter for the once or the continuous mode of operation You can set the white balance auto functionality from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the balance auto functionality Select auto function ROI 2 camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI2 Set the position and size of selected auto function ROI In this example we set auto function ROI to cover th ntire sensor cam
155. d acA2040 90 127 6 5 2 Exposure Times for the acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 128 6 5 3 Setting the Parameter Value 0 eee eee 129 6 6 Electronic Shutter Operation lise 130 6 6 1 Global Shutter All Cameras Except acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acAA6D0 10 vebidockkce amp cctteexebeRreYER RIDERE exce AERE 130 6 6 2 Rolling Shutter acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 Only 132 6 6 2 1 The Flash Window 0 2000 cee eee 138 6 7 Overlapping Image Acquisitions 1 2 sanaaa eee 142 6 7 4 Overlapping Image Acquisitions for all Models Except acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 0 eee 142 6 7 2 Overlapping Image Acquisitions for acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 ACRABGUOAIG Linee nitor nee Ree BE Mie ESSE Gd dua Bie at De 145 Basler ace USB 3 0 iii Table of Contents AW00123404000 6 8 Acquisition Monitoring Tools llle III 148 6 8 1 Exposure Active Signal lillselsele eee 148 6 8 2 Flash Window Sigrial seeseiesiii ewiew hEt RU dees rae mx v RE ES 150 6 8 3 Acquisition Status Indicator liliis 152 6 8 4 Trigger Wait Signals os ene e ER RE REV eR RR EE 153 6 8 4 1 Frame Burst Trigger Wait Signal nasasa auauua aaa 153 6 8 4 2 The Frame Trigger Wait Signal 0000 0 a ee 155 6 8 5 Camera Events ince cette ee eae egeo P RIA ee ee 161 6 9 Acquisition Timing Chart I Ih 162 6 10 Maximum Allowed Frame Rate
156. d out of the camera Sequencer set 1 was loaded because the Counter 2 count for sequencer set 0 was found to already have reached its maximum allowed value in the preceding frame acquisition The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 1 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is also found to be 1 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 1 has already reached its maximum and must start again with the next frame acquisition When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 2 is loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera Sequencer set 2 was loaded because the Counter 2 count for sequencer set 1 was found to already have reached its maximum allowed value in the preceding frame acquisition The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 2 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is found to be 2 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 2 has not yet reached its maximum and can therefore must start again with the next frame acquisition A trigger signal according to path 0 was received resetting the sequencer set cycle When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 0 is loaded into the active in accord with the preceding r
157. d supplies a signal that indicates the current status The Frame Burst Trigger Wait signal will go high whenever the camera enters a waiting for frame burst start trigger status The signal will go low when an external frame burst start trigger ExFBSTrig signal is applied to the camera and the camera exits the waiting for frame burst start trigger status The signal will go high again when the camera again enters a waiting for frame burst trigger status and it is safe to apply the next frame burst start trigger signal If you base your use of the ExFBSTrig signal on the state of the frame burst trigger wait signal you can avoid frame burst start overtriggering i e applying a frame burst start trigger signal to the camera when it is not in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status If you do apply a frame burst start trigger signal to the camera when it is not ready to receive the signal it will be ignored and a frame burst start overtrigger event will be reported Figure 71 illustrates the Frame Burst Trigger Wait signal with the Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter set to 3 and with exposure and readout overlapped on a camera with a global shutter The figure assumes that the trigger mode for the frame start trigger is set to off so the camera is internally generating frame start trigger signals Basler ace USB 3 0 153 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Frame Burst Trigger Wait Signal Frame Burst o
158. d the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about changing the selection of an output signal as the source signal for the output line see Section 5 12 1 on page 80 For more information about the electrical characteristics of camera output lines see Section 5 8 1 on page 60 and Section 5 9 3 1 on page 67 Basler ace USB 3 0 151 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 8 3 Acquisition Status Indicator If a camera receives a software frame burst start trigger signal when it is not in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status it will simply ignore the trigger signal and will generate a frame burst start overtrigger event If a camera receives a software frame start trigger signal when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status it will simply ignore the trigger signal and will generate a frame start overtrigger event The camera s acquisition status indicator gives you the ability to check whether the camera is in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status or in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status If you check the acquisition status before you apply each software frame burst start trigger signal or each software frame start trigger signal you can avoid applying trigger signals to the camera that will be ignored The acquisition status indicator is designed for use when you are using host control of image acquisition i e when you
159. da Cet appareil est conforme aux normes Classe A pour bruits radio lectriques sp cifi es dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique Life Support Applications These products are not designed for use in life support appliances devices or systems where malfunction of these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury Basler customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Basler for any damages resulting from such improper use or sale Warranty Note Do not open the housing of the camera The warranty becomes void if the housing is opened All material in this publication is subject to change without notice and is copyright Basler AG Contacting Basler Support Worldwide Europe Middle East Africa Basler AG An der Strusbek 60 62 22926 Ahrensburg Germany Tel 49 4102 463 515 Fax 49 4102 463 599 support europe baslerweb com The Americas Basler Inc 855 Springdale Drive Suite 203 Exton PA 19341 USA Tel 1 610 280 0171 Fax 1 610 280 7608 support usa baslerweb com Asia Pacific Region Basler Asia Pte Ltd 35 Marsiling Industrial Estate Road 3 05 06 Singapore 739257 Tel 65 6367 1355 Fax 65 6367 1255 support asia baslerweb com www baslerweb com AW00123404000 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 T
160. dings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 256 8 4 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats No Shift As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual the camera uses a 12 bit ADC to digitize the output from the imaging sensor When the camera is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 8 bit E M ae SEES Ba Oe ee effective depth by default the camera drops the 4 least significant bits from the ADC and transmits the 8 most significant bits bit 11 through 4 ADC is Not Shifted Shift by 1 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the output from the camera will include bit 10 through bit 3 from the ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting once is that the output of the 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 camera is effectively multiplied by 2 For example assume that the camera is set for no shift that it is IM viewing a uniform white target and that under these LB conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 10 If you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1 the reading would increase to 20 ADC Shifted Once If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 1 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will Basler ace USB 3 0 203 Features AW00123404000 automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by
161. e e e e e e e LneN2 eee a LineN 1 CU a LineN UU Exposure Time Sensor Readout Time e ol line exposure W line readout Fig 57 Global Shutter For more information about the exposure active output signal see Section 6 8 1 on page 148 For more information about the Sensor Readout Time parameter see Section 6 9 on page 162 Basler ace USB 3 0 131 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 6 2 Rolling Shutter acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 Only The acA1920 25um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc and acA4600 10uc cameras are equipped with an electronic rolling shutter The rolling shutter is used to control the start and stop of sensor exposure The rolling shutter used in these cameras has two operating modes electronic rolling shutter mode and global reset release mode Electronic Rolling Shutter Mode When the shutter is in the electronic rolling shutter operating mode ERS mode it exposes and reads out the pixel lines with a temporal offset designated as tRow from one line to the next When frame start is triggered the camera resets the top line of pixels of the ROI line one and begins exposing that line The camera resets line two tRow later and begins exposing the line The camera resets line three tRow later and begins exposing the line And so on until the bottom line of pixels is reached see Figure 58 The exposure time is the same for all lines and is determin
162. e V Software Signal trigger source Software Signal 1 for asynchronous reset of sequencer set advance delay between sending the reset command and it becoming effective i trigger signal generated externally X camera loads a sequencer set into the active set making it the current set current sequencer set that is in the active set immediately before the sequencer feature is enabled m current sequencer set that is used for image acquisition sequencer set was just loaded current sequencer set that is used for image acquisition already present in the active set fe Current sequencer set was in the active set before it was overwritten by sequencer set 1 7 ZZ camera is waiting for a frame start trigger 9 frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequencer Mode Set to Mode Set to On Off Software Signal 1 Trigger Source Path 0 V Software Signal 3 x Trigger Source y y y y Path 1 Torrese v v un v vy Y v v aia g LO J E H HD Oo BHU P Frame Start I j Trigger Signal B Time Fig 90 Use Case 3 Asynchronous Cycling Through Sequencer Sets According to Path 1 One Reset 242 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 7 Binning 8 7 1 Binning on Monochrome Cameras except the acA1920 25 and acA2500 14 where also the color camera allows D On all cameras the binning feature is available on monochrome c
163. e acA1600 20uc e e e E e acA1920 25uc e e acA1920 155uc e e e acA2000 165uc e e acA2040 90uc e e acA2500 14uc e e e 9 acA3800 14uc e e e acA4600 10uc e e Table 33 Pixel Formats Available on Color Cameras for Color Images format available Pixel Format Naming Convention Version 1 1 and above You can obtain the You can find detailed information about the mono and color pixel formats in the document from the Automated Imaging Association AIA Bayer Formats Depending on the camera model the cameras equipped with a Bayer pattern color filter can output color images based on the Bayer pixel formats given in Table 33 When a color camera is set for one of these Bayer pixel formats the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way For each pixel covered with a red portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output Basler ace USB 3 0 179 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00123404000 YUV Formats Most color cameras with a Bayer filter can output color images based on pixel data in YCbCr422 8 format When a color camera is set for this format each pixel value in the
164. e ExposureAuto_Continuous You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For general information about auto functions see Section 8 12 on page 261 For information about Auto Function ROls and how to set them see Section 8 12 3 on page 263 For information about minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time see Section 6 9 on page 162 Basler ace USB 3 0 273 Features AW00123404000 8 12 6 Auto Function Profile If you want to use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time the auto function profile feature also takes effect The auto function profile specifies whether the gain or the exposure time will be kept as low as possible when the camera is making automatic adjustments to achieve a target average gray value for the pixel data from the Auto Function ROI that was related to the gain auto function and the exposure auto function By default the auto function profile feature minimizes gain If you want to use the gain auto and the exposure auto functions at the same time you should set both functions for the continuous mode of operation Setting the camera with Basler pylon to use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time is a several step process To set the auto function profile using Basler pylon 1 Set the value of the Auto Function P
165. e ADC to 12 bits that will be transmitted by the camera The lookup table is essentially just a list of 4096 values however not every value in the table is actually used If we number the values in the table from 0 through 4095 the table works like this The number at location 0 in the table represents the 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the ADC reports that a pixel has a value of 0 The numbers at locations 1 through 7 are not used The number at location 8 in the table represents the 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the ADC reports that a pixel has a value of 8 The numbers at locations 9 through 15 are not used The number at location 16 in the table represents the 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the ADC reports that a pixel has a value of 16 The numbers at locations 17 through 23 are not used The number at location 24 in the table represents the 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the ADC reports that a pixel has a value of 24 And so on As you can see the table does not include a user defined 12 bit value for every pixel value that the sensor can report So what does the camera do when the ADC reports a pixel value that is between two values that have a defined 12 bit output In this case the camera performs a straight line interpolation to determine the value that it should transmit For example assume that the ADC reports a pixel va
166. e Acquisition N 3 Exposure Sensor Readout Mies Time Fig 63 Overlapped Exposure and Sensor Readout Determining whether your camera is operating with overlapped or non overlapped exposure and readout is not a matter of issuing a command or switching a setting on or off Rather the way that you operate the camera will determine whether the exposures and readouts are overlapped or not If we define the frame period as the time from the start of exposure for one frame acquisition to the start of exposure for the next frame acquisition then Exposure will not overlap when Frame Period gt Exposure Time Sensor Readout Time Exposure will overlap when Frame Period lt Exposure Time Sensor Readout Time You can determine the sensor readout time by reading the value of the Sensor Readout Time parameter The parameter indicates what the readout time will be in microseconds given the camera s current settings You can read the Readout Time parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to get the parameter value double d camera SensorReadoutTime GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily get the parameter value For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 143 Image Acquisition Con
167. e Default User Set High Gain User Set Auto Functions User Set User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 as the User Set Default i e as the startup user set The startup user set will automatically be loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset Instructions for designating a user set as the User Set Default appear below Basler ace USB 3 0 289 Features AW00123404000 8 17 1 Selecting a User Set If you want to load any of the six user sets into the Active User Set or if you want to configure User Set 1 User Set 2 or User Set 3 you must first select the desired user set When the camera is delivered the Default User Set will be selected To select a User Set using Basler pylon 1 Set the User Set Selector to the desired user set Default User Set High Gain User Set Auto Functions User Set User Set 1 User Set 2 or User Set 3 You can set the User Set Selector from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector If you want to select the Default User Set camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector_Default If you want to select the High Gain User Set camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector_HighGain If you want to select the Auto Functions User Set camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector AutoFunctions If you want to select e g User Set 1
168. e and You can achieve the tightest timing control if you set the frame start trigger signal as the source for the sequencer set advance trigger signal We also recommend using the fast edges of the input lines For more information about propagation delays of the input lines see Section 5 10 on page 69 Note You may occasionally encounter a transitional dummy sequencer set with index number 1 Ignore this set It occurs for technical reasons only and cannot be used for image acquisition 226 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Sequencer States Occurring During Start and in Sequencer Mode In the state diagram Figure 87 a total of four sequencer sets is considered The diagram illustrates sequencer start sequencer operation in sequencer mode and sequencer stop Operation in sequencer configuration mode see Section 8 6 1 on page 214 is not illustrated As illustrated in Figure 87 the camera must not acquire images when the sequencer feature is enabled Setting the sequencer mode to On will enable the sequencer feature When a frame start trigger occurs the sequencer set configured as Sequencer Set Start will be loaded into the active set and will be used for the first image acquisition Sequencer Set Start will always be sequencer set 0 see Section 8 6 2 2 on page 217 By using the trigger for path 1 you can cycle through the available sequencer sets By using the trigger for path O you can return a
169. e data transmitted by the camera To avoid problems with EMI and ESD you should follow these general guidelines Always use high quality shielded cables The use of high quality cables is one of the best defenses against EMI and ESD Try to use camera cables that are only as long as necessary and try to run the camera cables and power cables parallel to each other Avoid coiling camera cables If the cables are too long use a meandering path rather then coiling the cables Avoid placing camera cables parallel to wires carrying high current switching voltages such as wires supplying stepper motors or electrical devices that employ switching technology Placing camera cables near to these types of devices can cause problems with the camera Attempt to connect all grounds to a single point e g use a single power outlet for the entire system and connect all grounds to the single outlet This will help to avoid large ground loops Large ground loops can be a primary cause of EMI problems Use a line filter on the main power supply Install the camera and camera cables as far as possible from devices generating sparks If necessary use additional shielding Decrease the risk of electrostatic discharge by taking the following measures Use conductive materials at the point of installation e g floor workplace Use suitable clothing cotton and shoes Control the humidity in your environment Low humidity can cause ESD problems In
170. e electronic rolling shutter mode Frame Acquisition N Frame Acquisition N 1 Frame Acquisition N 2 Time Fig 70 Flash Window Signal on Cameras with a Rolling Shutter Line Exposure I Line Readout The flash window signal is also available on cameras with a global shutter imaging sensor On global shutter cameras the flash window signal is simply the equivalent of the exposure active signal For more information about the rolling shutter and the flash window see Section 6 6 2 on page 132 150 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Selecting the Flash Window Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The flash window output signal can be selected to act as the source signal for a camera output line e g Line 2 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select the output line e g Line 2 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the flash window signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Line2 camera LineSource SetValue LineSource FlashWindow You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API an
171. e the Counter 2 count for sequencer set 1 was found to already have reached its maximum allowed value in the preceding frame acquisition The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 2 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is found to be 2 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 2 has not yet reached its maximum and can therefore can continue counting with next frame acquisition When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 2 was still present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera Sequencer set 2 was used again because the Counter 2 count for sequencer set 2 was found not to already have reached its maximum allowed value in the preceding frame acquisition The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 2 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 2 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is also found to be 2 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 2 has now reached its maximum and must start again with the next frame acquisition When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 3 is loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera Basler ace USB 3 0 235 Features AW00123404000 Seq
172. ected trigger camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set the acquisition burst frame count camera AcquisitionBurstFrameCount SetValue 5 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a trigger software command to apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera camera TriggerSoftware Execute Perform the required functions to parameterize the frame start trigger to trigger 5 frame starts and to retrieve 5 frames here camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to Frame Burst Start executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software frame burst start trigger signal to the camera You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 108 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 3 5 Using a Hardware Frame Burst Start Trigger 6 3 5 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is for example set to Line 1 an externally generated electrical signal injected into physical input line Line 1 on the camera will act as the frame burst start trigger signal for the camera This type
173. ed eseeessss 288 for user configuration 288 Basler ace USB 3 0 Index high gain factory setup 289 SAVING s dee ctetur genes 291 user set loaded at startup 293 V vertical binning 243 245 vertical decimation 249 binihifig 3c f Nes 250 image distortion 250 reduced resolution 250 ROI settings esses 251 SOUING 2s 3 eer i dd 249 vertical sub sampling see vertical decimation virtual sensor ssesesssssssss 247 W white balance see balance white white balance auto see balance white auto Y YUV pixel format 180 315 Index AW00123404000 316 Basler ace USB 3 0
174. ed by the Exposure Time parameter setting The pixel values for each line are read out at the end of exposure for the line Because the readout time for each line is also tRow the temporal shift for the end of readout is identical to the temporal shift for the start of exposure Camera Model Temporal Shift tRow 8 bit Pixel Format 12 bit Pixel Format 12 bit p Pixel Format acA1920 25um uc 35 000 us 35 000 us 35 000 us acA2500 14um uc 35 000 us 35 000 us 35 000 us acA3800 14um uc 24 725 us 30 975 us 28 475 us acA4600 10uc 30 750 us 37 000 us 33 875 us Table 25 Temporal Shift for Start of Exposure Between Two Consecutive Lines The Sensor Readout Time is the sum of the readout times of all lines The Total Readout Time equals the Sensor Readout Time plus the Exposure Overhead time C4 The Exposure Overhead time is needed to prepare the sensor for the next acquisition 132 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Camera Model Exposure Overhead C 8 bit Pixel Format 12 bit Pixel Format 12 bit p Pixel Format acA1920 25um 490 us 490 us 490 us acA2500 14um 490 us 490 us 490 us acA3800 14um 3536 us 4430 us 4072 us Table 26 Exposure Overhead Time for Mono Cameras Camera Model Exposure Overhead C 8 bit Pixel Format 12 bit Pixel Format 12 bit p Pixel Format acA1920 25uc 525 us 525 us 525 us acA2500 14u
175. ed to minimize propagation delays but mind their greater susceptibility to EMI compared to the opto isolated l Os Opto isolated l Os When you apply current to the input and output lines for extended periods or even for most of the time you will promote aging of the optocouplers Keep the times when current flows to a minimum to preserve stable propagation delays Signal edge to edge variation jitter resulting from I O operation itself is negligible but can be introduced by your trigger signal To avoid jitter make sure the slopes of your trigger signals are short preferably lt 500 ns The camera s inherent jitter is less than 100 ns peak to peak Basler ace USB 3 0 75 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 11 Configuring Input Lines and Signals 5 11 1 Selecting an Input Line as the Source Signal for a Camera Function You can select input line Line 1 and GPIO lines Line 3 and Line 4 if configured for input to act as the source signal for the following camera functions Frame Burst Start trigger Frame Start trigger Counter 1 reset Whenever a proper electrical signal is applied to the selected line the camera will recognize the signal as signal for the selected camera function For example when Line 1 was selected to act as the source signal for the frame burst start trigger camera will recognize an electrical signal applied to Line 1 as a frame burst start trigger Note When you apply an electrica
176. elays involved are longer than for a GPIO line 5 7 1 Electrical Characteristics Electric Shock Hazard Risk of Burn or Death The power supply used must meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and Limited Power Source LPS requirements A suitable power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order a power supply Fire Hazard Risk of Burn The power supply used must meet the Limited Power Source LPS requirements A suitable power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order a power supply Basler ace USB 3 0 57 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 NOTICE Voltage outside of the safe operating voltage range can cause damage The safe operating I O supply voltage range for the opto isolated input line differs from the safe operating voltage range for the opto isolated output line see Section 5 8 1 on page 60 and direct coupled GPIO lines Section 5 9 on page 63 for the I O input lines of Basler ace USB 3 0 cameras can differ from the safe operating voltage ranges for the I O input lines of other Basler cameras You must supply power within the safe operating voltage range The following voltage requirements and information apply to the camera s opto isolated I O input line pin 2 of the 6 pin connector Line 1 Voltage Significance 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum The absolute maximum must
177. ele Models odas Rhe LN TICUEI RD A WES RESA e LEN E be be eee ees 1 1 2 General Specifications 0 2 teens 2 1 35 sopectral RESPONSE sek A ces re pH IRI UID Nc e RE ee ene 14 1 3 1 Mono Camera Spectral Response 0 0 00 cece eee 14 1 3 2 Color Camera Spectral Response 0 cee eee 20 1 4 Mechanical Specifications leere 26 1 4 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points llis 26 1 4 2 Maximum Allowed Lens Thread Length 0 00 e eee eee ee 29 1 5 Mounting Instructions ssas a sepe ec ee I a a 31 1 5 1 Tightening Sequence When Using the M2 Screws 0 0 31 1 5 2 Tightening Sequence When Using the M3 Screws 0 32 1 6 Mechanical Stress Test Results 0 00 e cece eee 33 1 7 Software Licensing Information 0 0 cee eee 34 1 8 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems 0 0 00 cee eee 35 1 9 Environmental Requirements naaa 36 1 9 1 Temperature and Humidity llle 36 1 9 2 Heat Dissipation 2 4 selbe RIDE ERA DESEAS Rs 36 1 10 Precautlons ru IR pera a AERE WEREAWR SERA MLAde EE EE EE 37 2 Installati n osse rx Ee RE a 04a anm XE OR RC heen KR 41 3 Camera Drivers and Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 43 3 1 The Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite 0002 ee 43 Sl Thepylom VIGWet ou mE weber eis Pelee P VEEREYGYwESES 44 3 1 2 The pylon USB Configurator
178. eless when exposure starts for the last row of the current ROI This assumes that Flash Window Start is selected as the Timer Trigger Source You can set the Trigger Selector and the Timer Trigger Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl camera TimerTriggerSource SetValue TimerTriggerSource ExposureStart You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 5 12 6 2 Setting the Timer Delay Time You can set the Timer 1 delay by setting the Timer Delay parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us To set the delay for Timer 1 1 Use the Timer Selector to select Timer 1 2 Setthe value of the Timer Delay parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timer1 camera TimerDelay SetValue 100 0 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more
179. els Sensor Height read only contains the physical height of the sensor in pixels Max Width read only Indicates the camera s maximum region of interest ROI width setting for the current OffsetX settings Max Height read only Indicates the camera s maximum region of interest ROI height setting for the current OffsetY settings You can read the values for all of the device information parameters or set the value of the Device User ID parameter from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to read the parameters or write the Device User ID Read the Device Vendor Name parameter GenICam gcstring s camera DeviceVendorName GetValue Read the Device Model Name parameter GenICam gcstring s camera DeviceModelName GetValue Read the Device Manufacturer Info parameter GenICam gcstring s camera DeviceManufacturerInfo GetValue Read the Device Version parameter GenICam gcstring s camera DeviceVersion GetValue Read the Device Firmware Version parameter 284 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features GenICam gcstring s camera DeviceFirmwareVersion GetValue Read the Device Serial Number parameter GenICam gcstring s camera DeviceSerialNumber GetValue Write and read the Device User ID parameter camera D GenICam viceUserID SetVa
180. en Using the M2 Screws To tighten the M2 screws 1 Tighten the screws for the mounting screw holes a in Figure 27 2 Tighten the screws for the mounting screw holes b in Figure 27 a b EA A S eS a b Fig 27 Designations of the Mounting Screw Holes for the M2 Screws Basler ace USB 3 0 31 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 1 5 2 Tightening Sequence When Using the M3 Screws To tighten the M3 screws 1 Tighten the screws for the mounting screw holes a in Figure 28 2 Tighten the screw for mounting screw hole b in Figure 28 a Bottom a Fig 28 Designations of the Mounting Screw Holes for the M3 Screws 32 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 6 Mechanical Stress Test Results Cameras were submitted to an independent mechanical testing laboratory and subjected to the stress tests listed below The mechanical stress tests were performed on selected camera models After mechanical testing the cameras exhibited no detectable physical damage and produced normal images during standard operational testing Test Standard Conditio
181. en output line status and certain external conditions The opto isolated and the GPIO output lines are considered The line status information depends among others on whether the output line inverter is disabled or enabled Section 5 12 5 on page 87 and on the current setting of the UserOutputValue parameter Section 5 12 3 on page 84 Two types of installation are considered see Figure 47 The output line is connected to the external power supply with no external pull up resistor involved A external pull up resistor disconnected not useful for the opto isolated output line The output line is connected to the external power supply via an external pull up resistor B external pull up resistor connected Ground for A B Opto isolated I O 6 pin 6 pin Receptacle Receptacle Camera Camera Pull up Resistor Voltage Voltage Output Output Signal Signal to You to You TE PEPE eee Ground for Ground for Opto isolated I O Opto isolated I O Fig 47 Use of an External Pull up Resistor With an Output Line A No External Pull up Resistor Connected B External Pull up Resistor Connected The output circuits display open collector circuit behavior The GPIO lines are however equipped with a weak internal pull up resistor Make sure the ground for opto isolated I O and the ground of the power supply for the opto isolated output line are connected to the same ground For applicable pins see Table
182. enabled However the selected data chunks will only be appended if Chunk Mode Active is enabled Image data with related supplementary data are counted as chunk 1 for more details see Section 8 18 4 on page 303 Despite this fact image data i e the data for chunk 1 can be obtained even when Chunk Mode Active is disabled In this case however no trailing chunk data will be transmitted to the PC even not if individual data chunks are currently selected To enable Chunk Mode Active 1 Set the Chunk Mode Active parameter to true You can set the Chunk Mode Active parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Also note that when you enable ChunkModeActive the PayloadType for the camera changes from Pylon PayloadType Image to Pylon PayloadType ChunkData For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 296 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 18 3 Data Chunks You can select the individual data chunks to be appended to image data by selecting the kind if data chunk and then enabling it For details see below 8 18 3 1 Gain Chunk The gain chunk feature adds a chunk to each acquired ima
183. end tRow after the exposure ends for line two And so on until the bottom line of pixels is reached see Figure 59 The Sensor Readout Time is the sum of the readout times of all lines The Total Readout Time equals the Sensor Readout Time plus the Exposure Overhead time C4 Basler ace USB 3 0 135 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Camera Model Exposure Overhead C 8 bit Pixel Format 12 bit Pixel Format 12 bit p Pixel Format acA1920 25um 810 us 810 us 810 us acA2500 14um 810 us 810 us 810 us acA3800 14um 22285 us 28516 us 48371 us Table 28 Exposure Overhead Time for Mono Cameras Camera Model Exposure Overhead C 8 bit Pixel Format 12 bit Pixel Format 12 bit p Pixel Format acA1920 25uc 810 us 810 us 810 us acA2500 14uc 810 us 810 us 810 us acA3800 14uc 22310 us 28545 us 48402 us acA4600 10uc 23273 us 30513 us 61217 us Table 29 Exposure Overhead Time for Color Cameras D If you want to use a flash window the global reset release mode gives you adv antages over using the electronic rolling shutter mode In global reset release mode the flash window width extends over the entire exposure time of a line in the sensor In electronic rolling shutter mode however the flash window width can only extend over part of exposure time of a sensor s line compare Figure 61 and Figure 60 Therefore at a given high frame rate the global
184. endently of the decimation vertical feature 248 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 8 Decimation Vertical acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 Only The decimation vertical feature lets you specify the extent of vertical sub sampling of the acquired frame i e you can define rows that you want to be left out from transmission The acA3800 14 and acA4600 90 cameras support decimation in vertical direction Examples Blue rows will be transmitted If vertical decimation is set to 1 the complete frame will be transmitted out of the camera no sub sampling is realized see Figure 96 This is valid for mono and color cameras 2 for mono cameras only every second row of the acquired frame will be transmitted out of the camera Figure 97 2 for color cameras only every second pair of rows of the acquired frame will be transmitted out of the Fig 96 Decimation Disabled camera Figure 98 Fig 97 Decimation of 2 Mono Cameras Fig 98 Decimation of 2 Color Cameras By using the vertical decimation feature you can increase the frame rate of the camera Setting Vertical Decimation You can enable vertical decimation for the acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 cameras by setting the Decimation Vertical parameter The parameter value can be set to 1 2 and 4 Setting the parameter value to 1 disables vertical decimation Basler ace USB 3 0 249 Features AW00123404000 You can set the De
185. enerate frame start trigger signals internally with no action by the user Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the frame burst start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame burst start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame burst start trigger Rising Edge Acquisition Burst Frame Count 3 Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger Off a trigger signal generated by the camera internally a trigger signal applied by the user RSA camera is waiting for a frame burst start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal AE frame exposure and readout frame transmission Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed KXXXXX XxXxX A XXX L SEA bR Frame Burst Start 2 Trigger Signal applied to Line 1 ZA uu Frame Start Trigger Signal A oe meras el arem emend eh a s mcm ae ceo ce Time Fig 79 Use Case 3 Frame Burst Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger Off Basler ace USB 3 0 173 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Use Case 4 Frame Burst Start and Frame Start Triggers Both On Use case four is illustrated on page 175 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the frame burst start trigger mode is set to on the
186. ensitive elements pixels to the vertical shift registers see Figure 29 on page 48 The charges from the bottom row of pixels in the array are then moved into a horizontal shift register Next the charges are shifted out of the horizontal register As the charges move out of the horizontal shift register they are converted to voltages proportional to the size of each charge Each voltage is then amplified by a Variable Gain Control VGC and digitized by an Analog to Digital converter ADC After each voltage has been amplified and digitized it passes through an FPGA and into an image buffer All shifting is clocked according to the camera s internal data rate Shifting continues in a row wise fashion until all image data has been read out of the sensor The pixel data leaves the image buffer and passes back through the FPGA to a controller where it is assembled into data packets The packets are then transmitted by bulk transfer via a USB 3 compliant cable to a USB 3 host adapter of the host PC The controller also handles transmission and receipt of control data such as changes to the camera s parameters The image buffer between the sensor and the controller allows data to be read out of the sensor at a rate that is independent of the data transmission rate between the camera and the host PC This ensures that the data transmission rate has no influence on image quality Basler ace USB 3 0 47 Camera Functional Description AW00123404000 Pr
187. ent status of all output lines with a single operation by using the UserOutputValueAll parameter value The UserOutputValueAll parameter value is expressed as a hexadecimal number in the Basler pylon Viewer and as a 32 bit word in the Basler pylon API with 0 as a constant value on bit 0 As shown in Figure 45 each bit from bit 1 through 3 is associated with a different user settable output line The status of each output line is expressed by its related binary parameter value If a bit is O it indicates that the line status of the associated line is currently low If a bit is 1 it indicates that the line status of the associated line is currently high When you read the hexadecimal number of the UserOutputValueAll parameter value convert it to its binary equivalent to make the current status of each output line immediately apparent Parameter value of UserOutputValue for Line 2 Parameter value of UserOutputValue for Line 3 configured for output Parameter value of UserOutputValue for Line 4 configured for output Bit 1 N o S a e R e Ed edd TES Me E EE MESES MESES x x x 0 Reserved Fig 45 Bit Field of the UserOutputValueAll Parameter Bit Numbers and Assignment of Output Lines See Section 5 13 1 on page 90 for details about the relation between line status and its determining factors e g electrical signal level line inverter setting and user output setting To set and check the status of all us
188. eplace the present one in the active set SequencerTriggerSource Selects the trigger source for the trigger that will load the next sequencer set into the active set The following sequencer trigger sources are available for more information see the section below Note that Line 3 and Line 4 can be selected regardless of whether they are configured for input or output Line 1 Line IN Line 3 GPIO set for input Line 4 GPIO set for input Software Signal 1 Software command Software Signal 2 Software command Software Signal 3 Software command not available on acA1920 155 cameras Counter 2 End Frame Start For each selected sequencer trigger source the following parameters must be set see also Figure 86 SequencerTriggerActivation Selects the line status required to trigger loading of the next sequencer set into the active set The only available parameter value is Level High Synchronous and Asynchronous Sequencer Set Advance The mechanisms for sequencer set advance vary between sequencer trigger sources The triggers from some sequencer trigger sources only select the next sequencer set and the loading into the active set occurs with the subsequent frame start trigger The triggers from the other sequencer trigger sources select and load the next sequencer set The mechanisms are presented in greater detail in the following table and sections 218 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Sequencer Tr
189. er outputs with a single operation 1 Set the value of the UserOutputValueAll parameter to set all user output values For example If you wanted to set each one of bits 1 through 3 to 1 you would set the UserOutputValueAll parameter value to xE or to 14 the hexadecimal and decimal equivalents of 1110 2 Read the value of the UserOutputValueAll parameter to determine the current settings of all user output values You can set and read the UserOutputValueAll parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read the parameter value In this example the UserOutputValueAll parameter value is set to 0 Basler ace USB 3 0 85 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 Setting all user output values with a single operation camera UserOutputValueAll SetValue 0 Reading all user output values with a single operation int64 t i camera UserOutputValueAll GetValue Set the value of the User Output Value parameter to true 1 or false 0 This will set the status of the output line 86 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 12 5 Output Line Inverter You can set output line Line 2 and GPIO lines Line 3 and Line 4 if configured for output to invert or not to invert the electrical output signal If you enable or disable the inverter one frame acquisition will automatically occur To set the invert function for
190. era AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue O camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue O camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Set mode of operation for balance white auto function camera BalanceWhiteAuto SetValue BalanceWhiteAuto Once You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler ace USB 3 0 275 Features AW00123404000 For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For general information about auto functions see Section 8 12 on page 261 For information about Auto Function ROIs and how to set them see Section 8 12 3 on page 263 8 12 8 Using an Auto Function To use an auto function using Basler pylon Select an Auto Function ROI Assign the auto function you want to use to the selected Auto Function ROI Unassign the auto function you want to use from the other Auto Function ROI Set the position and size of the Auto Function ROI If necessary set the lower and upper limits for the auto function s parameter value If necessary set the target value If necessary set the auto function profile to define priorities between auto functions OnNoaraen gt Enable the auto function by setting it to once or continuous For more information about the individual settings see the previous sections tha
191. ertical SetValue 2 Enable horizontal binning by 4 camera BinningHorizontal SetValue 4 Disable vertical and horizontal binning camera BinningVertical SetValue 1 camera BinningHorizontal SetValue 1 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 246 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 7 4 Considerations When Using Binning Increased Response to Light Using binning can greatly increase the camera s response to light When binning is enabled acquired images may look overexposed If this is the case you can reduce the lens aperture the intensity of your illumination the camera s exposure time setting or the camera s gain setting When using vertical binning on monochrome cameras the limits for the minimum gain settings are automatically lowered This allows you to use lower gain settings than would otherwise be available For the lowered limits for the minimum gain settings see Section 8 1 on page 195 Note The vertical binning of the acA1920 25mc works differently For more information see Section 8 7 on page 243 Reduced Resolution Using binning effectively reduces the resolution of the camera s imaging sensor For example the sensor in the acA640 90um camera normally has a resolution of 659 H x 494 V If you set this camera to u
192. erty must be adjusted quickly to achieve a specific target value and when a specific target value must be kept constant in a series of images An Auto Function Region of Interest Auto Function ROI lets you designate a specific part of the image as the base for adjusting an image property Each auto function uses the pixel data from an Auto Function ROI for automatically adjusting a parameter value and accordingly for controlling the related image property Some auto functions use their own individual Auto Function ROI and some auto functions share a single Auto Function ROI An auto function automatically adjusts a parameter value until the related image property reaches a target value Note that the manual setting of the parameter value is not preserved For example when the Gain Auto function adjusts the gain parameter value the manually set gain parameter value is not preserved For some auto functions the target value is fixed For other auto functions the target value can be set as can the limits between which the related parameter value will be automatically adjusted For example the gain auto function lets you set an average gray value for the image as a target value and also set a lower and an upper limit for the gain parameter value Generally the different auto functions can operate at the same time For more information see the following sections describing the individual auto functions pertinent camera settings and wi
193. es llssleleesseeees en 287 BECIESIJCq P A TE 288 8 17 1 Selecting a User Set 0 0 cee tee 290 8 17 2 Saving aUser Set 0 0 ce eere 291 8 17 3 Loading User Set into the Active User Set 2 0020005 292 8 17 4 Designating a User Set as the User Set Default 293 Basler ace USB 3 0 V Table of Contents AW00123404000 8 18 Chunk Features 0 2 eee tees 295 8 18 1 What are Chunk Features 0 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 295 8 18 2 Chunk Mode Active 0 eee 295 8 18 3 Data CHUNKS ossi ha Pelt peeiTug P YER betes Baa es Ete eye SO 297 8518 9 1 Gave MONK x sce arose cr Sie xo et eee Bea pe S essi 297 8 18 3 2 Line Status All Chunk 0 0 00 eee ee 297 8 18 8 3 Exposure Time Chunk 0 0 0 cee ees 298 8 18 3 4 Timestamp Chunk 0 0 0 0c cee eee 299 8 18 3 5 Counter Value Chunk 0 0 00 cee ce ee 300 8 18 3 6 CRC Checksum Chunk EXE cae ed eee eS 302 8 18 4 Retrieving Data Chunks 1 0 2 eee 303 9 Troubleshooting and Support 0 0 cece eee 305 9 1 Tech Support Resources 0 ce tenes 305 9 2 Obtaining an RMA Number sssssseee tees 305 9 3 Before Contacting Basler Technical Support 0 0 elles 306 REVISION HISIOE 3oc206ertdentceb bb isdt pei ebocddemiacks Phas eee eeaw outs 309 UO teen ae ws tery et teretes base Becta eile e ea lth as os Seeds 311 vi Basler ace USB 3
194. eset signal and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 0 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is found to be 1 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 0 has already reached its maximum and must start again with the next frame acquisition When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 1 is loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera Sequencer set 1 was loaded because the Counter 2 count for sequencer set 0 was found to already have reached its maximum allowed value in the preceding frame acquisition 236 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 1 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is also found to be 1 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 1 has already reached its maximum and must start again with the next frame acquisition When the Sequencer Mode parameter value is set to Off the sequencer feature becomes disabled for the application of sequencer sets during image acquisitions The sequencer parameter values that were the current ones before the sequencer feature was enabled
195. esses the colorfulness of a color At maximum saturation no shade of gray is present At minimum saturation no color but only some shade of gray including black and white is present Basler ace USB 3 0 187 Color Creation and Enhancement Gray Decrease Saturation Adjustment Increase Hue Adjustment AW00123404000 Fig 83 Hue and Saturation Adjustment In the Color Hexagon Adjustments Are Indicated for Red as an Example 188 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement Hue and Saturation Adjustment The color adjustment feature lets you adjust hue and saturation for the primary and the secondary colors Each adjustment affects those areas in the image where the adjusted color predominates For example the adjustment of red affects the colors in the image with a predominantly red component Keep in mind that when you adjust a color the nearest neighboring colors in the color hexagon will also be affected to some degree For example when you adjust red yellow and magenta will also be affected Hue In the color hexagon the adjustment of hue can be considered as a rotation between hues Primary colors can be rotated towards and as far as their neighboring secondary colors And secondary colors can be rotated towards and as far as their neighboring primary colors For example when red is rotated in negative direction towards yellow then for example purple in the image ca
196. everal facts the leakage current will have stronger effect when load currents are low the propagation delay of the output increases as load currents decrease higher impedance circuits tend to be more susceptible to EMI higher currents yield higher voltage drop on long cables Basler ace USB 3 0 61 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 Figure 36 shows a schematic for the opto isolated output line Ground for Opto isolated I O 6 pin I Receptacle 3 3 to 241 Camera VDC Voltage Output Signal to You Ground for Opto isolated I O Fig 36 Opto isolated Output Line Schematic with a Typical Voltage Output Circuit Simplified Figure 37 shows a typical circuit you can use to monitor the output line with an LED or an optocoupler In this example the voltage for the external circuit is 24 VDC Current in the circuit is limited by an external resistor Ground for Opto isolated I O L 6 pin Receptacle VDC LED Camera A Output to You Ground for Opto isolated l O Fig 37 Opto isolated Output Line Schematic with a Typical LED Output Signal at 24 VDC for the External Circuit Simplified For more information about output line pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 5 2 on page 52 For more information about the Exposure Active signal see Figure 6 8 1 on page 148 62 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 9 Direct coupled General Purpose I O GPIO Pin 1 Line 3
197. everse Y feature Note however that the position of an image ROI relative to the sensor remains the same regardless of whether or not the reverse Y feature is enabled As a consequence an image ROI will display different images depending on whether or not the reverse Y feature is enabled Auto function ROIs will behave analogously to image ROIs For more information about auto functions see Section 8 12 on page 261 Setting Reverse Y You can enable or disable the reverse X feature by setting the ReverseY parameter value You can set the parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Enable reverse Y camera ReverseY SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 255 Features AW00123404000 8 10 Luminance Lookup Table Using the Luminance Lookup Table for Cameras with 12 bit ADC Data and Pixel Format Set for 12 Bit Output Whenever the camera is set for a 12 bit pixel format e g Mono 12 the 12 bits transmitted out of the camera for each pixel normally represent the 12 bits reported by the camera s ADC The luminance lookup table feature lets you use a custom 12 bit to12 bit lookup table to map the 12 bits reported out of th
198. executed Once the Acquisition Stop command is received the camera will no longer be able to acquire frames acquisition frame rate for a given ROI cannot be achieved This is true because the camera performs a complete internal setup cycle for each single frame and because it cannot be operated with overlapped exposure To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous acquisition mode and use overlapped exposure For more information about overlapped exposure see Section 6 9 on page 162 D When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible Basler ace USB 3 0 101 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Setting the Acquisition Mode and Issuing Start Stop Commands You can set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and you can execute Acquisition Start or Acquisition Stop commands from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The code snippet below illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and to execute an Acquisition Start command where Line 1 is taken as an example Note that the snippet also illustrates setting several parameters regarding frame triggering These parameters are discussed later in this chapter camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_SingleFrame camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameStart camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On came
199. ey were extensively tested for optimum performance For more information about recommended USB 3 0 cables see the following document Recommended Accessories for Basler USB 3 0 Cameras DG001115 For downloading the document and for information about purchasing go to the Basler website www baslerweb com 5 5 1 USB 3 0 Cable Use a high quality USB 3 0 cable If possible only use a cable that was recommended in document DG001115 and preferably use a cable that was obtained from Basler To avoid EMI the cable must be shielded Close proximity to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields should be avoided in your installation We recommend to obtain a suitable cable from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order cable assemblies 5 5 2 O Cable A single I O cable is used to connect to the camera s I O lines In your installation close proximity to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields should be avoided The end of the I O cable that connects to the camera must be terminated with a Hirose micro plug plug type HR10A 7P 6S or the equivalent The cable must be wired to conform with the pin assignments shown in the pin assignment table The maximum length of the I O cable is at least 10 m The cable must be shielded and have twisted pair wire to ensure that input signals are correctly received The required 6 pin Hirose plug is available from Basler Basler also offers cable assemblies that are
200. for automatically adjusting a parameter value and accordingly for controlling the related image property Some auto functions always share an Auto Function ROI and some auto functions can use their own individual Auto Function ROIs Within these limitations auto functions can be assigned to Auto Function ROIs as desired Each Auto Function ROI has its own specific set of parameter settings and the parameter settings for the Auto Function ROls are not tied to the settings for the ROI that is used to define the size of captured images Image ROI For each Auto Function ROI you can specify a portion of the sensor array and only the pixel data from the specified portion will be used for auto function control Note that an Auto Function ROI can be positioned anywhere on the sensor array An Auto Function ROI is referenced to the top left corner of the sensor array The top left corner of the sensor array is designated as column 0 and row 0 as shown in Figure 106 The location and size of an Auto Function ROI is defined by declaring an X offset coordinate a width a Y offset coordinate and a height For example suppose that you specify the X offset as 14 the width as 5 the Y offset as 7 and the height as 6 The area of the array that is bounded by these settings is shown in Figure 106 Only the pixel data from the area of overlap between the Auto Function ROI defined by your settings and the Image ROI will be used by the related auto functio
201. frame rate parameter and set the frame rate Enabling the acquisition frame rate parameter allows the camera to control the frame rate internally camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue true camera AcquisitionFrameRate SetValue 60 0 114 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Start frame capture Camera AcquisitionStart Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 115 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 4 2 Using a Software Frame Start Trigger 6 4 2 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software frame start trigger signal to the camera to begin each frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status frame exposure will start when the software frame start trigger signal is received by the camera Figure 50 illustrates frame acquisition with a software frame start trigger signal When the camera receives a software trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new frame start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting
202. g Processing Ld T ADC i Digital Processing gt Pixel Data Fig 31 CMOS Sensor Architecture Basler ace USB 3 0 49 Camera Functional Description AW00123404000 Frame Burst Trigger Signal or Frame Start Trigger Signal or Frame Counter Reset Signal or Trigger Input Counter Reset Signal Frame Burst Trigger Wait Signal or Frame Trigger Wait Signal or Exposure Active Signal or Flash Window Signal or Timer 1 Signal not available for acA3800 14 and aA4600 10 cameras Controller PC Image and Control Data and Power Control ROI Gain Black Level Fig 32 Camera Block Diagram 50 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 Physical Interface This chapter provides detailed information such as pinouts and voltage requirements for the physical interface on the camera This information will be especially useful during your initial design in process The chapter also includes information abut the required cables connecting to the camera cables hubs for use with Basler ace USB 3 0 cameras Recommended external components are listed in the document named Recommended Components for Basler USB 3 0 Cameras DG001115 You can download the document from our website www baslerweb com O Note that Basler recommends specific external components host adapters Some of the recommended external components are available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative t
203. g and frame start triggering work in some common situations and with some common combinations of parameter settings These use cases do not represent every possible combination of the parameters associated with frame burst start and frame start triggering They are simply intended to aid you in developing an initial understanding of how these two triggers interact In each use case diagram the black box in the upper left corner indicates how the parameters are set The use case diagrams are representational They are not drawn to scale and are not designed to accurately describe precise camera timings Use Case 1 Frame Burst Start and Frame Start Triggers Both Off Free Run Use case one is illustrated on page 169 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger are both set to off The camera will generate all required frame burst start and frame start trigger signals internally When the camera is set this way it will constantly acquire images without any need for triggering by the user This use case is commonly referred to as free run The rate at which the camera will acquire images will be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate parameter unless the current camera settings result in a lower frame rate If the Acquisition Frame Rate parameter is disabled the camera
204. g signal rises and continues until the ExFSTrig signal falls If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExFSTrig signal falls and continues until the ExFSTrig signal rises Figure 53 illustrates trigger width exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the exposure time for each captured frame ExFSTrig Signal Period Exposure ExFSTrig Signal ca gt a Fig 53 Trigger Width Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode you must also set the camera s Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter This parameter setting will be used by the camera to operate the Frame Trigger Wait signal 120 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control You should set the Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter value to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure mode and that you intend to use the ExFSTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us In this case you would set the camera s Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter to 3000 us For more information about the Frame Trigger Wait signal and the Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter see Section 6 8 4 on page 153 Basler ace USB 3 0 121 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Trigger Widt
205. ge containing the gain All parameter value used for the image acquisition To enable the gain chunk 1 Use the Chunk Selector to select the Gain chunk 2 Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the gain chunk to true Once the gain chunk is enabled and Chunk Mode Active is enabled the camera will append a gain chunk to each acquired image After an image with an appended chunk has been received by your PC the chunk must be retrieved For information about retrieving data chunks see Section 8 18 4 on page 303 You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon Camera Software Suite The following code snippet illustrates using the API to activate the chunk mode select the gain chunk and enable the gain chunk make chunk mode active select and enable Gain chunk camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector_Gain camera ChunkEnable SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Camera Software Suite and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 8 18 3 2 Line Status All Chunk The line status all chunk feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing the line status all parameter value To enable the line status all chunk 1 Use the Chunk Selector to select the Line Status All chunk 2 Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the
206. ger for path 0 Trigger for path 1 a o Ea on lss S S x o o 5 k o o o D E E E Trigger for path 1 Fig 87 State Diagram for the Sequencer Mode Start and Operation Four Sequencer Sets as an Example 228 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 6 4 1 Sequencer Use Case Descriptions and Diagrams The following use case descriptions and diagrams illustrate operation of the sequencer feature in sequencer mode The use cases refer to some common situations and combinations of parameter settings These use cases do not represent every possible combination of the parameters settings associated with the sequencer The use cases are simply intended to aid you in developing an initial understanding of the relation between parameter settings and sequencer operation In each use case diagram the black box in the upper left corner indicates how the parameters are The use case diagrams are representational They are not drawn to scale and are not designed to accurately describe precise camera timings set All trigger signals shown in the use case diagrams assume rising edge triggering Note however that the timing of triggers involving a GPIO line is tighter constrained when set for falling edge triggering see Section 5 10 on page 69 The use cases assume that a total of four sequencer sets is available Use Case 1 Cycling Through Sequencer Sets According to Path 1 Use case one
207. gnal ExFSTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExFSTrig signal can be used to trigger frame acquisition The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status frame acquisition will start whenever the appropriate edge transition is received by the camera When the camera receives a hardware trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new frame start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new frame start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status When the camera is operating under control of an ExFSTrig signal the period of the ExFSTrig signal will determine the rate at which the camera is acquiring frames 1 Frame Rate ExFSTrig period in seconds For example if you are operating a camera with an ExFSTrig signal period of 20 ms 0 020 s EE f 0 020 90 Ps So in this case the frame rate is 50 fps acquire frames at too high a rate some of the frame trigger signals that you apply will be received by the camera when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera will ignore any frame start trigger signals that it receives when
208. gnals until it receives an Acquisition Stop command The rate at which the frame start trigger signals are generated can be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate parameter If the parameter is not enabled the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the maximum rate allowed with the current camera settings If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value less than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the rate specified by the parameter setting If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value greater than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the maximum allowed frame rate waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about the Keep in mind that the camera will only react to frame start triggers when it is in a acquisition status see Section 6 1 on page 97 and Section 6 3 on page 103 Exposure Time Control with the Frame Start Trigger Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s Exposure Time parameter For more information about the camera s Exposure Time parameter see Section 6 5 on page 127 112 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 4 1 2 Fr
209. gned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer set that is sequencer set 2 into the active set The parameter values for sequencer set 2 overwrite the parameter values for sequencer set 1 in the active set A frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 2 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes low The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes high When the next frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal assigned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer set that is sequencer set 3 into the active set The parameter values for sequencer set 3 overwrite the parameter values for sequencer set 2in the active set A frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 3 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes low The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes high When the next frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal assigned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer set that is sequencer set 0 into the active set The parameter values for sequencer set 0 overwrite the parameter values for sequencer set 3in the active se
210. h Exposure Mode acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the exposure time for each captured frame When trigger width exposure mode is selected the exposure time for each frame acquisition will be the sum of two individual time periods see Figure 54 The first time period is the exposure time that is controlled by the ExFSTrig signal If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the first time period and therewith the exposure time begins when the ExFSTrig signal rises The first time period ends when the ExFSTrig signal falls If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the first time period begins when the ExFSTrig signal falls The first time period ends when the ExFSTrig signal rises The second time period is the exposure time offset C4 It is automatically added to the first time period by the camera s sensor The length of the exposure time offset depends on the bit depth of the current pixel format 8 bit or 12 bit and on the currently available USB 3 0 bandwidth expressed as Device Link Throughput The exposure time offsets C4 and their dependence from pixel format bit depth and USB 3 0 bandwidth are given in Table 22 and Figure 55 ExFSTrig Signal Period gt a 5 Timing Adjustment Timing adjusted gem T ExFSTrig Signal Exposure Controlled by Timing adjusted Exposure from ExFSTrig Signal Bi DL Time Offset C4
211. he active user set You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Load command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the selector and execute the command If you want to load e g User Set 2 camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector_UserSet2 camera UserSetLoad Execute If you want to load the Default User Set camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector Default camera UserSetLoad Execute If you want to load the High Gain User Set camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector HighGain camera UserSetLoad Execute If you want to load the Auto Functions User Set camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector AutoFunctions camera UserSetLoad Execute 292 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have a single image D Loading a user set into the active set is only allowed when the camera is idle i e acquisition pending Loading the Default User Set with the standard factory setup into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover The standard factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will provide good camera performance in most cases You can also use the Basler pylo
212. he maximum specified value for the housing temperature during operation Keep in mind that the camera will gradually become warmer during the first hour of operation After one hour the housing temperature should stabilize and no longer increase Provide sufficient heat dissipation by e g mounting the camera on a substantial thermally conductive component that can act as a heat sink and by using a fan to provide an air flow over the camera To ensure good image quality we recommend not to operate the camera at elevated temperatures 36 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 10 Precautions Electric Shock Hazard Risk of Burn or Death The power supplies used for supplying power to the I O lines and camera power must meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and Limited Power Source LPS requirements If you use a powered hub as part of the USB 3 0 connection the powered hub must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Fire Hazard Risk of Burn The power supplies used for supplying power to the I O lines and camera power must meet the Limited Power Source LPS requirements If you use a powered hub as part of the USB 3 0 connection the powered hub must meet the LPS requirements Voltage outside of the specified range can cause damage You must supply camera power that complies with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification The camera
213. hen capturing images of moving objects the images will be distorted due to the temporal shift between the start of exposure for each line You can avoid distortion problems by using flash lighting and by applying the flash during the flash window for each frame The flash window is the period of time during a frame acquisition when all of the lines in the sensor are open for exposure Figure 60 illustrates the flash window for the electronic rolling shutter mode You can calculate when the flash window will open i e the time from the point where the frame is triggered until the point where the window opens using this formula Time to Flash Window Open tRow x ROI Height 1 You can calculate the flash window width i e how long the flash window will remain open using this formula Flash Window Width Exposure Time Parameter Setting tRow x ROI Height 1 138 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Camera Model Temporal Shift tRow 8 bit 12 bit 16 bit acA1920 25um uc 35 us independent of bit depth acA2500 14um uc 35 us independent of bit depth acA3800 14um uc 24 725 us 28 475 us 31 412 us acA4600 10uc 30 775 us 33 500 us 37 025 us Table 30 Temporal Shift for Start of Exposure Between Two Consecutive Lines by Pixel Format Bit Depth Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 8 Line 9 Line 10 Line 11 e e e e e Line N 2
214. hrough 31 Accordingly up to 32 different sequencer sets are available To have sequencer sets available for your specific requirements you will however usually want to configure the sequencer sets This will include changing parameter values to make them appropriate for your requirements see Section 8 6 3 on page 222 To change the parameter values of a sequencer set you must first load the sequencer set into the active set For more information about sequencer configuration see Section 8 6 3 on page 222 For more information about the active set see Section 8 17 on page 288 Sequencer Modes The sequencer feature will be enabled when you set it to either of two different modes In the sequencer configuration mode the sequencer sets can be configured but not be used for image acquisition The sequencer configuration mode must be set to On and the sequencer mode must be set to Off In the sequencer mode also called sequencer mechanism the sequencer sets can be used for image acquisition but not be configured The sequencer mode must be set to On 214 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features The sequencer feature will be disabled when the sequencer configuration mode and the sequencer mode are both set to Off D When the sequencer feature is in sequencer mode the parameter values of the current sequencer set cannot be changed using the pylon API or the pylon Viewer Only those sequencer set parameter values w
215. ht to left whenever you signal the camera to capture a new image To display this test pattern on a monitor you must convert the Y CbCr output from the camera to 8 bit RGB Fig 109 Test Image Six Basler ace USB 3 0 283 Features AW00123404000 8 15 Device Information Parameters Each camera includes a set of device information parameters These parameters provide some basic information about the camera The device information parameters include Device Vendor Name read only contains the camera vendor s name Device Model Name read only contains the model name of the camera Device Manufacturer Info read only can contain some information about the camera manufacturer This string usually indicates none Device Version read only contains the device version number for the camera Device Firmware Version read only contains the version of the firmware in the camera Device ID read only contains the serial number of the camera Device User ID read write is used to assign a user defined name to a device This name will be displayed in the Basler pylon Viewer and the Basler pylon USB Configurator The name will also be visible in the friendly name field of the device information objects returned by pylon s device enumeration procedure Device Scan Type read only contains the scan type of the camera for example area scan Sensor Width read only contains the physical width of the sensor in pix
216. ible parameter values for the Exposure Time parameter Table 24 for acA2000 165um umNIR uc and acA2040 90um umNIR uc cameras The other camera models are considered in Section 6 5 1 The minimum allowed exposure times depend on bit depth of the current pixel format and on the currently available USB 3 0 bandwidth see Table 24 and Figure 56 Camera Model Pixel Device Link Throughput Exposure Time us Format Bit MByte s Depth bit Minimum Maximum Increment Allowed Possible acA2000 165 8 108 000 42 10000000 1 umumNIRue gt 108 000 to lt 140 000 32 m gt 140 000 to 160 020 28 um umNIR uc gt 160 020 to 180 000 25 gt 180 000 to lt 192 112 24 gt 192 112 to lt 216 000 42 gt 216 000 to 280 000 32 gt 280 000 to 320 040 28 gt 320 040 to lt 360 000 25 gt 360 000 to lt 384 224 24 12 All allowed values 28 10000000 1 Table 24 Minimum Allowed and Maximum Possible Exposure Times With Dependencies 128 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 50 45 40 35 304 25 Minimum Allowed Exposure Time us acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 8 bit 20 acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 12 bit T T T T 100 200 300 400 Device Link Throughput MByte s Fig 56 Minimum Allowed Exposure Times Depending on Device Link Throughput All 8 bit and 12 bit Pixel Formats 6 5 3 Setting the Parameter Value You can use the
217. igger Source Selects Next Sequencer Set Loads Next Sequencer Set Into the Active Set Frame Start Trigger Loads Next Sequencer Set Into the Active Set Type of Sequencer Trigger Source Sync Async Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Software Signal 1 Software Signal 2 Software Signal 3 Counter 2 End Frame Start Table 40 Sequencer Trigger Source and Related Mechanism for Sequencer Set Advance Not available on acA1920 155 cameras Sequencer Trigger Sources and Sequencer Set Advance Two different types of trigger sources are available for advancing from one sequencer set to the next When a trigger source for a so called synchronous trigger is selected the trigger will select the next sequencer set but the actual advance to the next sequencer set will happen with the next frame start trigger Each sequencer set advance is therefore closely tied to a frame start trigger and will accordingly be synchronous to the frame start trigger The sequencer trigger sources for synchronous triggers are Line 1 Line 3 Line 4 frame start and Counter 2 End see also Section 8 6 2 2 on page 217 When a trigger source for a so called asynchronous trigger is selected the advance to the next sequencer set will immediately be initialized by the trigger but will happen with some unspecified delay The sequencer set advance is therefore not tied to frame start triggers and accordi
218. igger Wait Signals If a camera receives a hardware frame burst start trigger signal when it is not in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status it will simply ignore the trigger signal and will generate a frame burst start overtrigger event If a camera receives a hardware frame start trigger signal when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status it will simply ignore the trigger signal and will generate a frame start overtrigger event The camera s frame burst trigger wait signal gives you the ability to check whether the camera is in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status If you check the frame burst trigger wait signal before you apply each hardware frame burst start trigger signal you can avoid applying frame burst start trigger signals to the camera that will be ignored The camera s frame trigger wait signal gives you the ability to check whether the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status If you check the frame trigger wait signal before you apply each hardware frame start trigger signal you can avoid applying frame start trigger signals to the camera that will be ignored These signals are designed to be used when you are triggering frame burst start or frame start via a hardware trigger signal 6 8 4 1 Frame Burst Trigger Wait Signal As you are acquiring frames the camera automatically monitors the frame burst start trigger status an
219. igger signals via hardware you must first select the frame burst start or the frame start trigger and indicate that input line 1 will be used as the source for the selected trigger signal At that point each time a proper electrical signal is applied to input line 1 an occurrence of the selected trigger signal will be recognized by the camera The Trigger Selector The concept of the trigger selector is very important to understand when working with the acquisition start and frame start triggers Many of the parameter settings and the commands that apply to the triggers have names that are not specific to a particular type of trigger for example the frame burst start trigger has a mode setting and the frame start trigger has a mode setting But in Basler pylon there is a single parameter the Trigger Mode parameter that is used to set the mode for both of these triggers Also the Trigger Software command mentioned earlier can be executed for either the frame burst start trigger or the frame start trigger So if you want to set the Trigger Mode or execute a Trigger Software command for the frame burst start trigger rather than the frame start trigger how do you do it The answer is by using the Trigger Selector parameter Whenever you want to work with a specific type of trigger your first step is to set the Trigger Selector parameter to the trigger you want to work with either the frame burst start trigger or the frame start trigger At that
220. ilable In addition Offset X and Offset Y will both be set to 8 pixels You can access the camera s full resolution by setting the offset values to 0 and the image ROI to 1936 x 1216 pixels Basler ace USB 3 0 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 Specification acA2000 165um umNIR uc acA2040 90um umNIR uc Sensor Size um umNIR 2048 x 1088 um umNIR 2048 x 2048 H x V pixels uc 2040 x 1086 uc 2040 x 2046 Sensor Type CMOSIS CMV2000 2E5M 2E12M 2E5C CMOSIS CMV4000 2E5M 2E12M 2E5C Progressive scan CMOS Progressive scan CMOS Global shutter Global shutter Optical Size 2 3 a Effective Sensor Diagonal 12 8 mm 16 0 mm Pixel Size H x V 5 5 um x 5 5 um Max Frame Rate 168 fps 90 fps Mono Mono NIR Color Mono or mono NIR or color color models include a Bayer pattern RGB filter on the sensor Data Output Type USB 3 0 nominal max 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed Pixel Formats Mono Models Mono 8 Mono 12 Color Models Bayer BG 8 Bayer BG 12 Mono 12p Bayer BG 12p ADC Bit Depth 12 bit 10 bit for 8 bit pixel formats Synchronization Via external trigger signal via the USB 3 0 port or free run Exposure Control Via external trigger signal or programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements Nominal 5 VDC SELV and LPS compliant and in accord with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification supplied via the camera s
221. ill be displayed that were active before the sequencer was enabled You will not be able to see the parameter values delivered by the current set We recommend that you do not attempt to read or change any of the sequence parameters when the sequencer feature is enabled D Because your parameter values for the sequencer sets only reside in volatile memory the parameter values will be lost and reset to the default values if the camera is reset or switched off You will then have to populate the sequencer sets with your parameter values again Note also that sequencer sets can not be saved in user sets 8 6 2 The Sequencer and the Active Set During operation the camera is controlled by a set of configuration parameters settings that reside in the camera s volatile memory This set of parameter settings is known as the active set When you use the pylon API or the pylon Viewer to make a change to a camera parameter such as the Gain you are making a change to the active set And because the active set controls camera operation you will see a change in camera operation when you change a parameter value in the active set For more information about the active set see Section 8 17 on page 288 The parameters in the active set can be divided into two types Non sequencer parameters The parameter values in the active set cannot be changed using the sequencer feature This also means that the non sequencer paramete
222. imed exposure mod camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_Timed Set th xposure tim camera ExposureTime SetValue 3000 0 Basler ace USB 3 0 125 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition camera AcquisitionStart Execute Frame acquisition will start when the externally generated frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig signal goes high The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and execute the commands related to hardware frame start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode and the trigger mode for the frame burst start trigger set to off We will use the trigger width exposure mode with input line Line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the frame burst start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameBurstStart Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with external frame start trigger signals camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false
223. ine Status with Propagation Delays for Opto isolated Input and Direct coupled GPIO Inputs Line Inverters Disabled Basler ace USB 3 0 71 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 Internal line status logical levels Analog signal x Fast edge Transition threshold tpiH Propagation delay for the low high line status change ipu Propagation delay for the high low line status change Drawing not to scale Internal Line Status Opto isolated OUT Voltage VDC Direct coupled GPIO OUT C1 Voltage VDC Time Fig 42 Internal Line Status and Associated Output Signals with Propagation Delays for Opto isolated Output and Direct coupled GPIO Outputs Line Inverters Disabled 72 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 10 2 Factors Determining I O Temporal Performance A number of factors control the exact durations of propagation delays The influence for some of the factors is however ill constrained or unknown As a consequence generally valid and exact quantitative predictions of propagation delays are impossible The following factors apply Factors Influencing Camera I O Propagation Delays Input Output Opto isolated IN Direct coupled GPIOs Opto isolated OUT Direct coupled GPIOs Operating temperature Unknown but temperature must be within specified range see Section 1 9 1 on page 36 e o
224. information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 89 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 12 6 3 Setting the Timer Duration Time You can set the Timer 1 duration by setting the Timer Duration parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us To set the duration for Timer 1 1 Use the Timer Selector to select Timer 1 2 Set the value of the Timer Duration parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl camera TimerDuration SetValue 10 0 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 5 13 Significance of I O Line Status 5 13 1 Line Status for Input Lines This section informs about the relation between input line status and certain external conditions The opto isolated and the GPIO input lines are considered The line status information depends among others on whether the input line inverter is disabled or enabled Section 5 11 3 on page 79 Make sure the ground for opto isolated I O and the ground of the power supply for the opto isolated
225. ion The gamma correction feature lets you modify the brightness of the pixel values output by the camera s sensor to account for a non linearity in the human perception of brightness Gamma correction is always performed in the RGB color space after color binning was performed For more information about color binning see If color binning is enabled for the acA1920 25uc gamma correction will be applied Section 8 7 2 on page 245 approximately 0 4 will automatically be applied corresponding to an SRGB D When using a light source preset for a color camera a gamma correction value of gamma correction value Under these circumstances we recommend not to explicitly set a gamma correction value If you do nonetheless you will alter the effect of the selected light source preset For more information about light source presets see Section 7 3 2 on page 184 To accomplish gamma correction a gamma correction value y is applied to the pixel value of each red green or blue pixel according to the following formula shown for the red pixel value R as an example R Y uncorrected Reorrected R xR max max The formula uses uncorrected and corrected pixel brightnesses that are normalized by the maximum pixel brightness The maximum pixel brightness equals 255 for 8 bit output and 4095 for 12 bit output The gamma correction value can be set in a range from 0 to 3 99998 When the gamma correction
226. ion about the remove parameter limits feature see Section 8 3 on page 200 Basler ace USB 3 0 197 Features AW00123404000 8 2 Black Level Adjusting the camera s black level will result in an offset to the pixel values output by the camera Increasing the black level setting will result in a positive offset in the pixel values output for the pixels Decreasing the black level setting will result in a negative offset in the pixel values output for the pixels For example if the black level parameter value is increased by 1 the pixel value for each pixel is increased by 1 If the black level parameter value is decreased by 1 the pixel value for each pixel is decreased by 1 8 2 1 Setting the Black Level The black level can be adjusted by changing the value of the Black Level parameter The range of the allowed settings for the Black Level parameter value in DN varies by camera model as shown in Table 35 Camera Model Black Level Setting Min Allowed Max Allowed Max Allowed 8 bit depth 12 bit depth acA640 90 um uc 0 0 15 98438 255 75 acA640 120um uc 0 0 15 98438 255 75 acA645 100um uc 0 0 15 98438 255 75 acA1300 30um uc 0 0 15 98438 255 75 acA1600 20um uc 0 0 15 98438 255 75 acA1920 25um uc 0 0 15 9375 255 0 acA1920 155um uc 0 0 31 9375 511 0 acA2000 165um umNIR uc 0 0 15 9375 255 0 acA2040 90um umNIR uc 0 0 15 9375 255 0 acA2500 14um uc 0 0 15 9375 255 0 acA3800 14um
227. ion to easily set the parameters Note that the remove parameter limits feature will only be available at the guru viewing level For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 200 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 4 Digital Shift The digital shift feature lets you change the group of bits that is output from the ADC in the camera Using the digital shift feature will effectively multiply the output of the camera by 2 times 4 times 8 times or 16 times The next two sections describe how the digital shift feature works when the camera is set for a 12 bit pixel format and when it is set for a 8 bit pixel format There is also a section describing precautions that you must observe when using the digital shift feature and a section that describes enabling and setting the digital shift feature acA2040 90 cameras To obtain an effect similar to adjusting digital shift use the gain feature for analog adjustment For more information about the gain feature see Section 8 4 on page 201 D The digital shift feature is not available for the acA1920 155 acA2000 165 and 8 4 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats No Shift As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual the camera uses a 12 bit ADC to digitize the output from the imaging sensor When the camera is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 12 bit jpt Dt bit bit bt bit bit bt
228. ions Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 1 3 2 Color Camera Spectral Response The following graphs show the spectral response for each available color camera model characteristics and IR cut filter characteristics To obtain best performance from color models of the camera use of a dielectric IR cut filter is recommended The filter should transmit in a range from 400 nm to 700 720 nm and it should cut off from 700 720 nm to 1100 nm A suitable IR cut filter is built into the cylindric housing extension in color models of the camera D The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics light source Relative Response 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wavelength nm Fig 12 acA640 90uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 20 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Relative Response 500 Wavelength nm 550 600 Fig 13 acA640 120uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 1 0 650 700 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 5 0 6 0 4 Z Relative Response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 450 k 500 550 Wavelength nm 600 Fig 14 acA645 100uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Basler ace USB 3 0 21 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Rela
229. it is not waiting for frame start trigger This situation is commonly referred to as over triggering the camera If you are triggering frame acquisition with an ExFSTrig signal and you attempt to To avoid over triggering you should not attempt to acquire frames at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings For more information about setting the camera for hardware frame start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExFSTrig signal see Section 6 4 3 4 on page 125 For more information about the electrical characteristics of Line 1 see Section 5 7 1 on page 57 For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 6 10 on page 165 118 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 4 3 2 Exposure Modes If you are triggering the start of frame acquisition with an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal two exposure modes are available timed and trigger width acA1920 155um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc and D Trigger width exposure mode is not available on acA1920 25um uc acA4600 10um uc cameras Timed Exposure Mode When timed mode is selected the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s Exposure Time parameter If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExFSTrig signal rises If the camera is se
230. ixel The pattern of the Bayer filter used on the camera is as shown in Figure 81 the alignment of the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images with respect to the sensor is shown as an example only the figure shows the BG filter alignment As the figure illustrates within each square of four pixels one pixel sees only red light one sees only blue light and two pixels see only green light This combination mimics the human eye s sensitivity to color El i8 El i8 3 8 El i8 Ell i8 ERA ERA ERR ERE ER SEEN El i8 El i8 El i8 El i8 El i ARR ARR ERR ERE AR El i8 El i8 3 8 El i8 Fl Pixels Fig 81 Bayer Filter Pattern With BG Alignment as an Example Basler ace USB 3 0 177 Color Creation and Enhancement 7 1 1 Bayer Color Filter Alignment AW00123404000 The alignment of the Bayer filter to the pixels in the images acquired by color cameras depends on the camera model Table 32 shows the filter alignment for each available camera model Color Camera Model Filter Alignment acA640 90uc BG acA640 120uc BG acA645 100uc BG acA1300 30uc BG acA1600 20uc BG acA1920 25uc GB acA1920 155uc RG acA2000 165uc BG acA2040 90uc BG acA2500 14uc GB acA3800 14uc BG acA4600 10uc BG Table 32 Bayer Filter to Sensor Alignment All color camera models that have sensors equipped with a Bayer filter The alignment of the filter to the sensor s pixel
231. l only be possible after Counter 2 has reached the set Counter Duration value The counting starts from 1 to the set Counter Duration value and will then resume again from 1 The Counter Duration value can be set to an integer value between 1 and 256 The trigger source is generated within the camera Only available for path 1 You can achieve operation with tightly constrained timing between sequencer set advance and frame start triggers if you use an external signal for the frame start triggers and use the fast GPIO line s Line 3 and Line 4 as trigger sources for paths 0 and 1 The timing will be even tighter constrained if you use one GPIO line as trigger source for path 0 and the other GPIO line as the trigger source for both frame start trigger and path 1 triggering In this case you would ideally use the falling edges of the GPIO input signals as they are the fast edges See Section 5 10 on page 69 for information about making optimum use of the temporal performance of the GPIO lines See Section 5 9 on page 63 about the limitations of use of GPIO line 220 s in an environment with significant electromagnetic interference Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Trigger Sources for Asynchronous Sequencer Set Advance When triggers are applied from asynchronous trigger sources the triggers will be the software commands Software Signal 1 Software Signal 2 and Software Signal 3 The software commands will not
232. l signal to the input line the electrical signal must be appropriately timed for the function For detailed information about selecting an input line to act as the source signal for the frame burst start trigger and for details about how the frame burst start trigger operates see Section 6 3 on page 103 the frame start trigger and for details about how the frame start trigger operates see Section 6 4 on page 111 counter 1 reset and for details about how the counter value chunk feature operates see Section 8 18 3 5 on page 300 By default input line Line 1 is selected as the source signal for the frame start trigger 76 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 11 2 Input Line Debouncers The debouncer feature aids in discriminating between valid and invalid input signals and only lets valid signals pass to the camera The debouncer value specifies the minimum time that an input signal must remain high or remain low in order to be considered a valid input signal We recommend setting the debouncer value so that it is slightly greater than the longest expected duration of an invalid signal Setting the debouncer to a value that is too short will result in accepting invalid signals Setting the debouncer to a value that is too long will result in rejecting valid signals Note that the debouncer delays a valid signal between its arrival at the camera and its transfer The duration
233. lect the CRC checksum chunk 2 Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the CRC checksum chunk is enabled and Chunk Mode Active is enabled the camera will add a CRC checksum chunk to each acquired image To retrieve CRC checksum information from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC the image and its appended chunks must first be parsed Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the CRC checksum information For more information about retrieving chunk data see Section 8 18 4 on page 303 Note that the CRC checksum information provided by the chunk parser is not the CRC checksum itself Rather it is a true false result When the image and appended chunks pass through the parser the parser calculates a CRC checksum based on the received image and chunk information It then compares the calculated CRC checksum with the CRC checksum contained in the CRC checksum chunk If the two match the result indicates that the image data is OK If the two do not match the result indicates that the image is corrupted You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the CRC checksum chunk run the parser and retrieve the CRC checksum chunk data Make chunk m
234. ler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 78 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 11 3 Input Line Inverter You can set input line Line 1 and GPIO lines Line 3 and Line 4 if configured for input to invert or not to invert the incoming electrical signal Therefore the inverter setting is one of the factors defining whether a given electrical signal level will be considered to correspond to a high or low logical line status If you enable or disable the inverter one frame acquisition will automatically occur To set the invert function for an input line 1 Use the Line Selector to select for example Line 1 2 Set the value of the Line Inverter parameter to true to enable inversion on the selected line or to false to disable inversion You can set the Line Selector and the Line Inverter parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the input line camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Linel Enable the line inverter on the selected lin camera LineInverter SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer
235. ll examples in this section assume that the I O line inverters are disabled 5 10 1 Introduction As indicated in Section 5 2 on page 52 the camera provides two different kinds of I O lines opto isolated I O lines direct coupled General Purpose I O GPIO lines The related electrical characteristics and circuit schematics are given in Section 5 7 through Section 5 9 With regard to use the two kinds of I O lines differ mainly in these respects The opto isolated I O lines have the advantage of being distinctly more robust against EMI than the GPIO lines The propagation delays response times differ between the two kinds of I O lines A propagation delay is the time that elapses between the moment when a signal voltage passes through the transition threshold and the moment when the related line status changes or vice versa see Figure 41 for camera input and Figure 42 for camera output The following important characteristics are apparent from Figure 41 and Figure 42 The propagation delays for the opto isolated I O lines are in most cases longer than for the GPIO lines In other words the opto isolated I O lines are usually slower than the GPIO lines For each analog signal the rising edge and the falling edge are associated with different propagation delays The edge with the shorter propagation delay the fast edge is indicated by an asterisk Basler ace USB 3 0 69 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 Note In
236. lu gcstring s camera CAM 1 Read the Device Scan Type parameter DeviceScanType vic Set the D Link Select tor parameter camera DeviceLinkSelector Set Set the D vic camera DeviceLinkSelector SetVa tValue 0 Link Speed parameter Set the Devic Lue 0 Link Throughput Limit Mode camera DeviceLinkSelector SetValue 0 camera DeviceLinkThroughputLimitMod DeviceUserID GetValue Enums e camera DeviceScanType GetValue parameter SetValue Devic LinkThroughputLimitMode On Set the Device Link Throughput Limit parameter Bps camera DeviceLinkS ctor SetValue 0 camera DeviceLinkThroughputLimit SetValue 419430400 Read the Device Link Current Throughput parameter Bps camera DeviceLinkSelector SetValue 0 int64 t i camera DeviceLinkCurrentThroughput GetValue Read the Device SFNC Version Major parameter int64 t i camera DeviceSFNCVersionMajor GetValue Read the Device SFNC Version Minor parameter int64 t i camera DeviceSFNCVersionMinor GetValue Read the Device SFNC Version Sub Minor parameter int64 t i camera DeviceSFNCVersionSubMinor GetValue Basler ace USB 3 0 285 Features Read int64 t Read int64 t Read int64 t Read int64 t AW00123404000 SensorWidth parameter camera SensorWidth
237. lue of 12 In this case the camera would perform a straight line interpolation between the values at location 8 and location 16 in the table The result of the interpolation would be reported out of the camera as the 12 bit output Another thing to keep in mind about the table is that location 4088 is the last location that will have a defined 12 bit value associated with it Locations 4089 through 4095 are not used If the ADC reports a value above 4088 the camera will not be able to perform an interpolation In cases where the ADC reports a value above 4088 the camera simply transmits the 12 bit value from location 4088 in the table The advantage of the luminance lookup table feature is that it allows a user to customize the response curve of the camera The graphs below show the effect of two typical lookup tables The first graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the output of the camera increases linearly as the digitized sensor output increases The second graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the camera output increases quickly as the digitized sensor output moves from 0 through 2048 and increases gradually as the digitized sensor output moves from 2049 through 4096 256 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 4095 12 Bit more Camera Output 2048 1024 0 0 1024 2048 3072 4095 12 Bit Digitized Sensor Reading Fig 104 Lookup Table with Values Mapped in a Linear Fashion 4095 3072
238. m uc 0 0 db 3 59 db 22 258 db 6 103 db acA1920 25um uc 0 0 db 0 0 db 23 79814 db 23 79814 db acA1920 155um uc 0 0 db 0 0 db 24 0 db 24 0 db acA2000 165um umNIR uc 0 0 db 0 0 db 23 5935 db 23 5935 db acA2040 90um umNIR uc 0 0 db 0 0 db 23 5935 db 23 5935 db acA2500 14um uc 0 0 db 0 0 db 23 79814 db 23 79814 db acA3800 14um uc 0 0 db 0 0 db 16 67569 db 16 67569 db acA4600 10uc 0 0 db N A 17 76052 db 17 76052 db Table 34 Regular Minimum and Maximum Gain Settings 196 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features To set the Gain parameter value using Basler pylon 1 Set the Gain Selector to All 2 Set the Gain parameter to your desired value You can set the Gain Selector and the Gain parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector A11 camera Gain SetValue 0 0359 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 The minimum regular setting for the gain All parameter is the minimum setting that applies when the remove parameter limits feature is not used The minimum setting for the gain All parameter can be decreased from the regular setting to negative values by using the remove parameter limits feature For more informat
239. mation about configuring the input line see Section 5 11 on page 76 Basler ace USB 3 0 59 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 8 Opto isolated Output Pin 4 Line 2 The camera is equipped with one dedicated opto isolated output line designated as Line 2 The output line is accessed via the 6 pin connector on the back of the camera pin 4 see Figure 34 In addition the camera has two direct coupled GPIO lines Line 3 and Line 4 that can both be used as output lines They are described in Section 5 9 on page 63 against EMI than a GPIO line used as an output However when using the opto The opto isolated output line has the advantage of being distinctly more robust isolated output line the delays involved are longer than for a GPIO line 5 8 1 Electrical Characteristics Electric Shock Hazard Risk of Burn or Death The power supply used must meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and Limited Power Source LPS requirements A suitable power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order a power supply Fire Hazard Risk of Burn The power supply used must meet the Limited Power Source LPS requirements A suitable power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order a power supply 60 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface NOTICE Voltage outside of the safe operating voltage range
240. mation about trigger width exposure see Section 6 4 3 2 on page 119 144 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 7 2 Overlapping Image Acquisitions for acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 for global reset release rolling shutter mode Overlapped frame acquisition mode can only be performed when the camera is in the electronic rolling shutter Overlapped frame acquisition cannot be performed when the camera is set acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 cameras allow overlapped frame acquisition only when they are triggered internally free run i e when Trigger Mode is set to Off for the Frame Burst Start trigger and for the Frame Start Trigger When using a camera with a rolling shutter there are two common ways for the camera to operate with non overlapped acquisition and with overlapped acquisition In the non overlapped mode of operation each time a frame is acquired the camera completes the entire acquisition process for a frame consisting of exposure plus sensor readout before acquisition of the next frame is started The acquisition of a new frame does not overlap any part of the acquisition process for the previous frame This situation is illustrated in Figure 65 with the camera using an external frame start trigger ExFSTrig Coo y LJ MM Signal Frame Acquisition N Frame Acquisition N 1 Frame Acquisition N 2
241. mera In this situation a sensing device is usually used to determine when a piece of plywood on the conveyor is properly positioned in front of the camera When the plywood is in the correct position the sensing device transmits an electrical signal to input line 1 on the camera When the electrical signal is received on line 1 it serves as a frame start trigger signal and initiates a frame acquisition The frame acquired by the camera is forwarded to an image processing system which will inspect the image and determine if there are any defects in the plywood s surface 170 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case Frame Burst Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger On The frame burst start trigger is off The camera will generate frame burst start trigger signals internally with no action by the user The frame start trigger is on and the frame start trigger source is set to input line Line 1 The user must apply a frame start trigger signal to Line 1 to start each frame exposure Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the frame burst start trigger Off Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge a trigger signal generated by the camera internally a trigger signal applied by the user 4 camera is waiting for a frame burst start trigger signal c
242. mera Link Configurator The pylon USB Configurator is a standalone application It allows you to obtain information about the architecture of the device tree to which your camera is connected and about the devices including your camera The pylon USB Configurator also allows you to automatically generate support information for Basler technical support for more information about automatically generating support information see Section 9 3 on page 306 44 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Camera Drivers and Tools for Changing Camera Parameters For more information about using the pylon USB Configurator see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with the Basler pylon Camera Software Suite AW000611 3 1 3 The pylon SDK After the Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite has been installed on your PC you can access all of the camera s parameters and can control the camera s full functionality from within your application software by using the pylon API The pylon Programmer s Guide and the pylon API Reference contain an introduction to the API and include information about all of the methods and objects included in the API The programmer s guide and API reference are included in the Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite The Basler pylon SDK includes a set of sample programs that illustrate how to use the pylon API to parameterize and operate the camera These samples include Microsoft Visual Studio solution and project files
243. mes Executing an Acquisition Stop command terminates the camera s ability to acquire frames When the camera receives an Acquisition stop command If the camera is not in the process of acquiring a frame its ability to acquire frames will be terminated immediately If the camera is in the process of acquiring a frame the frame acquisition process will be allowed to finish and the camera s ability to acquire new frames will be terminated The camera s Acquisition Mode parameter has two settings single frame and continuous The use of Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands and the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter setting are related If the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter is set for single frame after an Acquisition Start command has been executed a single frame can be acquired When acquisition of one frame is complete the camera will execute an Acquisition Stop command internally and will no longer be able to acquire frames To acquire another frame you must execute a new Acquisition Start command If the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter is set for continuous frame after an Acquisition Start command has been executed frame acquisition can be triggered as desired Each time a frame trigger is applied while the camera is in a waiting for frame trigger acquisition status the camera will acquire and transmit a frame The camera will retain the ability to acquire frames until an Acquisition Stop command is
244. meter The value of the Acquisition Frame Count can range from 1 to 255 With frame burst start triggering on the camera will initially be in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status When in this acquisition status the camera cannot react to frame start trigger signals If a frame burst start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the camera has received a number of frame start trigger signals equal to the current Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter setting it will return to the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status At that point you must apply a new frame burst start trigger signal to exit the camera from the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status Basler ace USB 3 0 105 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 3 3 Setting the Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters You can set the Trigger Mode and Trigger Source parameters for the frame burst start trigger and also set the Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode to on the Trigger Source to software and the Acquisition Burst Frame Count to 5
245. n Column 012 3 4 5 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Row 0 Y Offset ANID A A C5 N Auto Function Region of Interest Height Image Region of Interest X Offset Fig 106 Auto Function Region of Interest and Image Region of Interest Basler ace USB 3 0 263 Features AW00123404000 8 12 3 1 Assignment of an Auto Function to an Auto Function ROI By default the Gain Auto and the Exposure Auto auto functions are assigned to Auto Function ROI 1 and the Balance White Auto auto function is assigned to Auto Function ROI 2 The assignments can however be set as desired For example the Balance White Auto auto function can be assigned to Auto Function ROI 1 or all auto functions can be assigned to the same Auto Function ROI We strongly recommend not to assign an auto function to more than one Auto Function ROI although multiple assignments can be made One limitation must be borne in mind For the purpose of making assignments the Gain Auto and the Exposure Auto auto functions are always considered as a single brightness auto function and
246. n API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the gain auto function Select auto function ROI 1 as an example to allow Gain Auto to control image brightness camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 Basler ace USB 3 0 269 Features camera Set camera Au camera Au camera Au camera Au Set camera AutoFu camera AutoFu camera AutoFu camera AutoFu camera AutoFu camera AutoFu Select gai the gain a AutoFunctio the positio toFunctio toFunctionAOIOffs toFunctio toFunctionAOIHeight t n and size nAOIUseBrightness SetValu AW00123404000 true nAOIOffsetX SetValu of the auto function ROI 0 tY SetValue 0 nAOIWidth tionAOIOffs tX SetValu SetValue 1294 SetValue 964 the maximum possible size of the selected auto function ROI tionAOIOffsetY SetValu 0 tionAOIHeigh tionAOTHeight Cr ott all and set o function the 0 tionAOIWidth SetValue tionAOIWidth GetMax tValue tMax Se Ge upper and lower gain limits for camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector A11 camera camera Set A A t upper camera camera camera camera A A A A u u u u u u Set th toGainLowerl Limit SetValue 0 0 toGainUpperl he lowest po
247. n Control AW00123404000 The rise of the Frame Trigger Wait signal is based on the minimum time 400 us required between the end of exposure for the first line in frame N and the start of exposure for the first line in Frame N 1 Frame Trigger Wait Signal Signal ExFSTrig i lt gt ee C i E m ECC l _ i eT ERE LZ LLLI NN I es es i E p _ SSS ee _ a Frame Acquisition N Frame Acquisition N 1 Frame Acquisition N 2 gt Time E Line Exposure I Line Readout Fig 75 Frame Trigger Wait Signal on a Rolling Shutter Camera Camera in a waiting for frame start trigger status 160 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Selecting the Frame Trigger Wait Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The frame trigger wait signal can be selected to act as the source signal for a camera output line e g Line 2 Selecting a source signal for an output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select the output line e g Line 2 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the frame trigger wait signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the pa
248. n Viewer application to easily set the parameters 264 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 12 3 2 Positioning of an Auto Function ROI Relative to the Image ROI The size and position of an Auto Function ROI can be but need not be identical to the size and position of the Image ROI Note that the overlap between Auto Function ROI and Image ROI determines whether and to what extent the auto function will control the related image property Only the pixel data from the areas of overlap will be used by the auto function to control the image property of the entire image Different degrees of overlap are illustrated in Figure 107 The hatched areas in the figure indicate areas of overlap If the Auto Function ROI is completely included in the Image ROI see a in Figure 107 the pixel data from the Auto Function ROI will be used to control the image property If the Image ROI is completely included in the Auto Function ROI see b in Figure 107 only the pixel data from the Image ROI will be used to control the image property If the Image ROI only partially overlaps the Auto Function ROI see c in Figure 107 only the pixel data from the area of partial overlap will be used to control the image property If the Auto Function ROI does not overlap the Image ROI see d in Figure 107 the Auto Function will not or only to a limited degree control the image property For details see the sections below describing the individual au
249. n Viewer to easily set the selector For more information about the Basler pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 8 17 4 Designating a User Set as the User Set Default You can designate any user set from the camera s non volatile memory as the User Set Default Accordingly you can designate the user sets with factory setup Default User Set High Gain User Set Auto Function User Set and the user sets with parameter values previously saved by the user User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 or a subset The configuration set that you designate as the User Set Default will act as the startup set and will be loaded into the active user set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset the camera is idle i e when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have a single image acquisition pending Selecting the user set with the standard factory setup as the User Set Default and then loading the Default User Set into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover The standard factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will provide good camera performance in most cases D Selecting which user set will serve as the User Set Default is only allowed when Basler ace USB 3 0 293 Features AW00123404000 To designate a User Set as the User Set Default using Basler pylon The User Set
250. n be changed to red and red in the image can be changed to orange Red can be rotated as far as yellow where red will be completely transformed into yellow When red is rotated in a positive direction towards magenta then for example orange in the image can be changed to red and red in the image can be changed to purple Red can be rotated as far as magenta where red will be completely transformed into magenta Saturation Adjusting saturation changes the colorfulness intensity of a color The color adjustment feature lets you adjust saturation for the primary and secondary colors For example if saturation for red is increased the colorfulness of red colors in the image will increase If red is set to minimum saturation red will be replaced by gray for red colors in the image Color Adjustment Parameters You can use the Color Adjustment Selector parameter to select a color to adjust The colors you can select are red yellow green cyan blue and magenta You can use the Color Adjustment Hue parameter to set the hue for the selected color as a floating point value in a range from 4 0 to 3 96875 Hue is not changed when the parameter value is set to 0 The default value after camera reset or power up is close to 0 You can use the Color Adjustment Saturation parameter to set the saturation for the selected color as a floating point value in a range from 0 0 to 1 99219 Saturation is not changed when the parameter value is set t
251. n delay 69 recommendations for use 75 temporal performance 69 image distortion sesessss 250 image region of interest lieight 3 Rex 207 OffSeLtXuuiisnaasassebusehue 207 OffSet Y nc refunds 207 WIR zia REID 207 input line direct coupled voltage requirements 65 67 input line opto isolated electrical characteristics 57 60 inverter see line inverter IR cut filter 181 L EED ifidicator iiu 53 lens mount GOD es 26 27 CS mount ssssssssseee 26 28 lens thread length max allowed 29 181 licensing EZ A lie as eate heise lata utet iE 34 light source color temperature 184 Daylight 5000 I itc oeste 184 Daylight 6500 K a 184 Orc RR NI NN 184 preset coire teet ria 184 Tungsten 2800 K 184 light source preset sssssse 191 Basler ace USB 3 0 Index line inverter OUtpUt line ie 87 IMG LOGIC sie eere iiie ete is 94 line minimum output pulse width 82 SORT1Q sia hee tie lies 83 line status all 1 0 lines iis 85 94 output lines ssse 85 94 line status all emen 297 line status all chunk 297 line sub sampling see vertical decimation lookup table tenens 256 luminance lookup table
252. n status it cannot react to frame start trigger signals When a frame burst start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera can then react to frame start trigger signals The camera will continue to react to frame start trigger signals until the number of frame start trigger signals it has received is equal to an integer parameter setting called the Acquisition Burst Frame Count At that point the camera will return to the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and will remain in that status until a new frame burst start trigger signal is applied As an example assume that the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on the Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter is set to three and the camera is in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status When a frame burst start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has received three frame start trigger signals it will return to the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status At that point you must apply a new frame burst start trigger signal to the camera to make it exit waiting for frame burst start trigger Frame Start Trigger Assuming that
253. nal 1 Software Signal 2 Software Signal 3 the latter not available on acA1920 155 cameras Specific software commands analogous to the Software command Line 1 When the source signal is set to Line 1 you apply a frame burst start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line Line 1 on the camera Line 3 Analogous to the Line 1 source signal However the Line 3 is a GPIO line and must be configured for input Line 4 Analogous to the Line 3 source signal If the Trigger Source parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to Line 1 Line 3 or Line 4 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame burst start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame burst start trigger When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter must be set to continuous 104 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 3 2 Acquisition Burst Frame Count When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on you must set the value of the camera s Acquisition Burst Frame Count para
254. ncer set 0 was still present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The first Software Signal 3 trigger is sent It will however only later become effective When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 0 was still present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The Software Signal 3 trigger has not yet become effective The first Software Signal 3 trigger becomes effective after some delay loading sequencer set 1 into the active set When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 1 is present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The second Software Signal 3 trigger is sent It will however only later become effective The second Software Signal 3 trigger becomes effective after some delay loading sequencer set 2 into the active set When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 2 is present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The third Software Signal 3 trigger is sent It will however only later become effective The fourth Software Signal 3 trigger is sent It will however only later become effective The third Software Signal 3 trigge
255. ness camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 camera AutoFunctionAOIUseBrightness SetValue true Set the position and size of the auto function ROI camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue 0 camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue 1294 camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue 964 Set the maximum possible size of the selected auto function ROI camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue 0 camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Set the exposure time limits for exposure auto control camera AutoExposureTimeLowerLimit SetValue 1000 0 272 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features camera AutoExposureTimeUpperLimit SetValue 500000 0 Set the target gray value for the selected auto function The parameter value range refers to the theoretically maximum available range of gray values for the set pixel format For example if an 8 bit pixel format is set a parameter value of 0 50196 will correspond to a gray value of 128 camera AutoTargetBrightness SetValue 0 50196 Set the mode of operation for the exposure auto function camera ExposureAuto SetValu
256. never be exceeded Otherwise the camera can be damaged and the warranty becomes void 0 to 24 VDC Safe operating I O input voltage range 0 to 1 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0 inverter disabled voltage level low of Section 5 13 on page 90 gt 1 4 to 2 2 VDC Region where the transition threshold occurs the logical status is not defined in this region gt 2 2 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1 inverter disabled voltage level high of Section 5 13 on page 90 Table 11 Voltage Requirements and Information for the Opto isolated Input Line Note A minimum current of 5 mA must be provided to the I O input line Figure 35 shows a schematic for the opto isolated input line The absolute maximum input supply voltage is 30 0 VDC The current draw for the input line is between 5 mA and 15 mA As an example the use of a TTL or CMOS logic gate in the external circuit is shown 58 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 6 pin Receptacle Camera Logic Gate Ground for Opto isolated I C Fig 35 Opto isolated Input Line Schematic with a Typical External Circuit Simplified For more information about input line pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 5 2 on page 52 For more information about how to use an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal to control acquisition start see Section 6 4 on page 111 For more infor
257. ng conditions and note the readings for the brightest pixels If any of the readings are above 2048 do not use digital shift If all of the readings are below 2048 you can safely use the shift by 1 setting If all of the readings are below 1024 you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings If all of the readings are below 512 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 or 3 settings If all of the readings are below 256 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 3 or 4 settings If you will be using an 8 bit format make this check Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 8 bit pixel format and no digital shift Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the brightest pixels If any of the readings are above 128 do not use digital shift If all of the readings are below 128 you can safely use the shift by 1 setting If all of the readings are below 64 you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings If all of the readings are below 32 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 or 3 settings If all of the readings are below 16 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 3 or 4 settings Basler ace USB 3 0 205 Features AW00123404000 8 4 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift You can enable or disable the digital shift feature by setting the value of the Digital Shift parameter When the parameter is set to zero digital shift will be disabled When the parameter is set to
258. ng plus the Height setting must not exceed 1080 Settings with Binning Disabled The minimum settings and minimum increments for Offset X Offset Y Width and Height are given below where a distinction is made between mono and color cameras It is assumed that binning is disabled 208 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Camera Model ROI Position and Size Mono Cameras Offset X Offset Y Width Height Mini Mini Mini Mini Mini Mini Mini Mini mum mum mum mum mum mum mum mum Incre Incre Incre Incre ment ment ment ment acA640 90um 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 acA640 120um 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 acA645 100um 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 acA1300 30um 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 acA1600 20um 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 acA1920 25um 0 1 0 1 64 1 64 1 acA1920 155um 0 4 0 2 4 4 1 1 acA2000 165um 0 1 0 1 8 8 1 1 acA2000 165umNIR 0 1 0 1 8 8 1 1 acA2040 90um 0 1 0 1 8 8 1 1 acA2040 90umNIR 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 acA2500 14um 0 1 0 1 64 1 64 1 acA3800 14um 0 1 0 1 64 1 64 1 Table 36 Minimum Settings and Increments for Positioning an Image ROI in Mono Cameras without Binning Basler ace USB 3 0 209 Features AW00123404000 Camera Model ROI Position and Size Color Cameras Offset X Offset Y Width Height Mini Mini Mini Mini Mini Mini Mini Mini mum mum mum mum mum mum mum mum Incre Incre Incre Incre ment ment ment ment acA640 90 uc 0 2 0
259. ng the Parameters Related to Software Frame Burst Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 108 6 3 5 Using a Hardware Frame Burst Start Trigger 0 2 eee ae 109 6 3 5 1 Introduction rss 2s ooo ee ey ee meer ee ea Rea 109 6 3 5 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Frame Burst Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 110 6 4 The Frame Start Trigger 0 00 cee tees 111 6 4 4 Frame Start Trigger Mode 0 eee eee 112 6 4 4 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Off 0000 112 6 4 1 2 Frame Start Trigger Mode On 0 00 eee eee 113 6 4 1 3 Setting The Frame Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters 114 6 4 2 Using a Software Frame Start Trigger 0 esee 116 6 4 8 4 Introduction 0 0 tee 116 6 4 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 117 6 4 8 Using a Hardware Frame Start Trigger 0 0 eee eee eee 118 6 4 35 Introduction s rese 206 ceca REX Ra RE eee eda wen 118 6 4 3 2 Exposure Modes 0 a eee eee 119 6 4 3 3 Frame Start Trigger Delay 0 0 2 ee 125 6 4 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 125 6 5 Setting the Exposure Time Parameter 00 000 eee eee eee 127 6 5 1 Exposure Times for All Models Except the acA2000 165 an
260. ng triggered in this manner it is important that you do not attempt to trigger frames at a rate that is greater than the maximum allowed There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate in Section 6 10 on page 165 Frame start trigger signals applied to the camera when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status will be ignored E frame exposure and readout ey frame transmission a frame start trigger signal that will be ignored because the camera is not in a waiting for frame start trigger status Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter setting 3 Acquisition Start Command Executed Frame Burst Start Trigger Signal Frame Start Trigger Signal Fig 49 Frame Burst Start and Frame Start Triggering Basler ace USB 3 0 Acquisition Stop Command Executed SSE SSS 99 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Applying Trigger Signals The paragraphs above mention applying a trigger signal There are two ways to apply a frame burst start or a frame start trigger signal to the camera via software or via hardware To apply trigger signals via software you must first select the acquisition start or the frame start trigger and then indicate that software will be used as the source for the selected trigger signal At that point each time a Trigger Software command is executed the selected trigger signal will be applied to the camera To apply tr
261. ngle frame you can only acquire one frame after executing an Acquisition Start command When one frame has been acquired the Acquisition Start command will expire Before attempting to acquire another frame you must execute a new Acquisition Start command Basler ace USB 3 0 97 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame an Acquisition Start command does not expire after a single frame is captured Once an Acquisition Start command has been executed you can acquire as many frames as you like The Acquisition Start command will remain in effect until you execute an Acquisition Stop command Once an Acquisition Stop command has been executed the camera will not be able to acquire frames until a new Acquisition Start command is executed Frame Bust Start Trigger The frame burst start trigger is essentially an enabler for the frame start trigger The frame burst start trigger has two modes of operation off and on If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required frame burst start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame burst start trigger signals to the camera If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on the initial acquisition status of the camera will be waiting for frame burst start trigger see Figure 49 on page 99 When the camera is in this acquisitio
262. ngly will be asynchronous to the frame start trigger The sequencer trigger sources for asynchronous triggers are Software Signal 1 Software Signal 2 Software Signal 3 see also Section 8 6 2 2 on page 217 Basler ace USB 3 0 219 Features AW00123404000 Trigger Sources for Synchronous Sequencer Set Advance When triggers are applied from synchronous trigger sources the advance from one sequencer set to the next will be closely tied to the frame start triggers When frame start trigger is the trigger source the next sequencer set will be immediately loaded into the active set as soon as a frame start trigger occurs and applied to the image acquisition Only available for path 1 When Line 1 dedicated input line or Line 3 or Line 4 GPIO lines set for input is the trigger source and when the related trigger signal occurs the signal will go high and thereby select the next sequencer set for sequencer set advance When a subsequent frame start trigger occurs the state of the trigger signal for sequencer set advance is evaluated As the level will be high the related sequencer set is loaded into the active set and is applied to the image acquisition The Counter 2 End trigger source is useful when you want that a user set is applied to a number of consecutive image acquisitions Counter 2 End refers to Counter 2 that counts consecutive frame start triggers When Counter 2 End is the trigger source advance to the next sequencer set wil
263. nput line 1 opto isolated output line and 2 direct coupled GPIO lines power supplies must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Lens Mount C mount Size L x W x H 29 3 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm without cylindric housing extension or connectors 48 2 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm with cylindric housing extension and connectors Weight lt 80g Conformity CE UL FCC GenlCam V 2 x including PFNC V 1 x and SFNC V 2 x IP30 RoHS USBS Vision USB IF in preparation The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Table 4 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 Specification acA1920 25um uc Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 4 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification acA1920 155um acA1920 155uc Sensor Size um 1936 x 1216 uc 1936 x 1216 H x V pixels Sensor Type Sony IMX174LLJ C Sony IMX174LQJ C Progressive scan CMOS Progressive scan CMOS Global shutter Global shutter Optical Size 1 1 2 Effective Sensor Diagonal 13 4 mm Pixel Size H x V 5 86 um x 5 86 um Max Frame Rate at full resolution 15
264. ns Vibration sinusoidal each axis DIN EN 60068 2 6 10 58 Hz 1 5 mm 58 500 Hz 20 g 1 Octave Minute 10 repetitions Shock each axis DIN EN 60068 2 27 20 g 11 ms 10 shocks positive 20 g 11 ms 10 shocks negative Bump each axis DIN EN 60068 2 29 20 g 11 ms 100 shocks positive 20 g 11 ms 100 shocks negative Vibration broad band random digital control each axis DIN EN 60068 2 64 15 500 Hz 0 05 PSD ESS standard profile 00 30 h Table 9 Mechanical Stress Tests The mechanical stress tests were performed with a dummy lens connected to a C mount The dummy lens was 35 mm long and had a mass of 66 g Using a heavier or longer lens requires an additional support for the lens Basler ace USB 3 0 33 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 1 7 Software Licensing Information The software in the camera includes the LZ4 implementation The copyright information for this implementation is as follows LZ4 Fast LZ compression algorithm Copyright C 2011 2013 Yann Collet BSD 2 Clause License http www opensource org licenses bsd license php Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary
265. nsformation Value Selector and Color Transformation Values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the values in the matrix Note that the values in this example are just randomly selected numbers and do not represent values that you should actually use Select a position in the matrix camera ColorTransformationValueSelector SetValue ColorTransformationValueSelector Gain00 Set the value for the selected position as a floating point value camera ColorTransformationValue SetValue 1 5625 Select a position in the matrix camera ColorTransformationValueSelector SetValue ColorTransformationValueSelector Gain01 Set the value for the selected position as a floating point value camera ColorTransformationValue SetValue 0 4375 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 192 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement 7 3 5 A Procedure for Setting the Color Enhancements When setting the color enhancements on the camera we recommend using the procedure outlined below Since it makes changing camera parameters quick and easy we also recommend using the Basler pylon Viewer software when you are making adjustments Note The procedure aims at producing a color reproduction on a monitor
266. o 1 The default value after camera reset or power up is close to 1 Basler ace USB 3 0 189 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00123404000 Enabling and Setting Color Adjustment You can set the Color Adjustment Hue and Color Adjustment Saturation parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Select red as the color to adjust camera ColorAdjustmentSelector SetValue ColorAdjustmentSelector Red Set the red hue parameter value camera ColorAdjustmentHue SetValue 1 125 Set the red saturation parameter value camera ColorAdjustmentSaturation SetValue 1 375 Select cyan as the color to adjust camera ColorAdjustmentSelector SetValue ColorAdjustmentSelector_Cyan Set the cyan hue parameter valu camera ColorAdjustmentHue SetValue 1 6875 Set the cyan saturation parameter value camera ColorAdjustmentSaturation SetValue 0 85 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 190 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement 7 3 4 Color Transformation Introduction The main objective for using a color transformation matrix is to make corrections to the color information delivered by the camera s sensor The cor
267. o order external components 5 1 General Description of the Camera Connections The camera is interfaced to external circuitry via connectors located on the back of the housing A 6 pin connector used to provide access to the camera s I O lines A USB 3 0 Micro B port used to provide a nominal 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed data transfer connection There is also a LED indicator located on the back of the camera Figure 33 shows the location of the two connectors and the LED 6 pin Connector I O USB 3 0 Micro B Port Fig 33 Camera Connectors Basler ace USB 3 0 51 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 2 Camera Connector Pin Numbering and Assignments 5 2 1 6 pin Connector Pin Numbering and Assignments The 6 pin connector is used to access the physical input and output lines on the camera The pin numbering for the 6 pin connector is as shown in Figure 34 Fig 34 Pin Numbering for the 6 pin Connector The pin assignments and designations for the 6 pin connector are shown in Table 10 Pin Designation Function 1 Line 3 Direct coupled General Purpose I O GPIO 2 Line 1 Opto isolated I O IN 3 Line 4 Direct coupled General Purpose I O GPIO 4 Line 2 Opto isolated I O OUT 5 Ground for opto isolated I O 6 Ground for direct coupled GPIO Table 10 Pin Assignment
268. ode active select and enable CRC checksum chunk camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector PayloadCRC16 camera ChunkEnable SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 302 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 18 4 Retrieving Data Chunks When the chunk mode is active and data chunks are enabled the selected data chunks are appended to each acquired image when the image is transferred to the host PC see Section 8 18 1 on page 295 creating a set of chunks The set of chunks includes chunk 1 with the image data image data payload and related supplementary data chunk ID and length of the image data payload followed by the selected data chunks each one consisting of the chunk payload and supplementary data The PayloadSize parameter value for the device i e for the camera indicates the calculated maximum size maximum buffer size that can be expected to occur for a set of chunks The calculated maximum size is derived from the current camera parameter settings ROI size pixel format selected data chunks etc Make sure all camera parameters are set as desired before reading the PayloadSize parameter value The actual size of a set of chunks as received by the PC grab result can be read form the PayloadSize value for the grab result
269. ode snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector to e g User Set 1 and execute the command camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector UserSet1 camera UserSetSave Execute For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the Basler pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 291 Features AW00123404000 8 17 3 Loading User Set into the Active User Set You can load any user set from the camera s non volatile memory into the camera s active user set Accordingly you can load the user sets with factory setup Default User Set High Gain User Set Auto Function User Set and the user sets with parameter values previously saved by the user User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 or a subset into the camera s non volatile memory When you load a user set the loaded set overwrites the parameter settings in the active set Since the settings in the active set control the current operation of the camera the settings from the loaded set will now be controlling the camera To load a User Set from the non volatile memory into the active user set using Basler pylon 1 Set the User Set Selector to the desired User Set e g User Set 2 2 Execute a User Set Load command to load the selected user set into t
270. of the delay will be determined by the debouncer value Figure 43 illustrates how the debouncer filters out invalid input signals i e signals that are shorter than the debouncer value The diagram also illustrates how the debouncer delays a valid signal Unfiltered arriving signals Debouncer l I I I debouncer I value I I Transferred valid signal delay Timing charts are not drawn to scale Fig 43 Filtering of Input Signals by the Debouncer Basler ace USB 3 0 77 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 Setting the Debouncer You can set a debouncer value for input line Line 1 and for GPIO lines Line 3 and Line 4 if configured for input The debouncer value is determined by the value of the Line Debouncer Time parameter value The parameter is set in microseconds and can be set in a range from 0 to 20 000 us To set the debouncer 1 Use the Line Selector to select for example input line Line 1 2 Set the value of the Line Debouncer Time parameter You can set the Line Selector and the value of the Line Debouncer Time parameter from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the input line camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Linel Set the parameter value e g to 10 microseconds camera LineDebouncerTime SetValue 10 0 You can also use the Bas
271. of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external frame burst start trigger signal EXFBTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExFBTrig signal can be used to trigger frame burst start The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on the camera will initially be in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status It cannot react to frame start trigger signals when in this acquisition status When the appropriate ExFBTrig signal is applied to Line 1 e g a rising edge of the signal for rising edge triggering the camera will exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the number of frame start trigger signals received by the camera is equal to the current Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter setting the camera will return to the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status When a new ExFBTrig signal is applied to Line 1 the camera will again exit from the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about setting the camera for hardware frame burst start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExFBTrig signal see Section 6
272. ogressive Scan CCD Sensor Vert Vert Vert Vert ES Pixels aa Pixels Eos Pixels hoo Pixels Y La Ei Y Y _ _ le Y L Y y l ADC VGC Horizontal LC Shift Register Fig 29 CCD Sensor Architecture Progressive Scan Sensors Frame Burst Start Trigger Signal or Frame Start Trigger Signal or Frame Counter Reset Signal or Trigger InputCounter Reset Signal Frame Burst Trigger Wait Signal or Frame Trigger Wait Signal or Exposure Active Signal or Timer 1 Signal Image Buffer Image Data VGC ADC Controller PC Image and Control Data and Data Power Control Gain Black Level Control ROI Fig 30 Camera Block Diagram 48 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Camera Functional Description 4 2 Overview acA1920 25 acA1920 155 acA2000 165 acA2040 90 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 The camera provides features such as an electronic rolling shutter acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 acA4600 10 or a global shutter acA1920 155 acA2000 165 acA2040 90 and electronic exposure time control Exposure start and exposure time can be controlled by parameters transmitted to the camera via the Basler pylon API and the USB 3 0 interface There are also parameters available to set the camera for single frame acquisition or continuous f
273. olor Binning You can combine vertical and horizontal color binning see the example in Figure 95 Example Horizontal and Vertical Color Binning by 2 G R G R f B RI ic llr Fig 95 Combining Vertical and Horizontal Color Binning You can combine vertical and horizontal binning This however may cause objects to appear distorted in the image For more information about possible image distortion due to combined vertical and horizontal binning see Section 8 7 4 on page 247 8 7 3 Setting Binning You can enable vertical binning by setting the Binning Vertical parameter Setting the parameter s value to 2 3 or 4 enables vertical binning by 2 by 3 or by 4 respectively Setting the parameter s value to 1 disables vertical binning You can enable horizontal binning by setting the Binning Horizontal parameter Setting the parameter s value to 2 3 or 4 enables horizontal binning by 2 by 3 or by 4 respectively Setting the parameter s value to 1 disables horizontal binning You can set the Binning Vertical or the Binning Horizontal parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Enable vertical binning by 2 camera BinningV
274. olumns numbers 658 and 659 and rows numbers 493 and 494 were excluded from binning and image transmission In other words and expressed in therms of the physical sensor An effective image ROI was created whose resolution of 657 H x 492 V was smaller than the resolution of the originally set image ROI Only the pixels within the effective image ROI were used for binning And only these pixels Basler ace USB 3 0 247 Features AW00123404000 define the virtual sensor for the transmitted image The excess columns and rows were excluded from binning and from the virtual sensor Carry out the following routine whenever setting binning values To ensure that the scene of interest appears fully on the binned image 1 Set the binning as desired The related spatial information offset ROI width ROI height is expressed in terms of virtual sensor rows and columns 2 Acquire an image Check whether the scene you want to image is fully imaged 4 If necessary adjust the settings for the virtual rows or columns to fully image the scene of interest Possible Image Distortion Objects will only appear undistorted in the image if the numbers of binned lines and columns are equal With all other combinations the imaged objects will appear distorted If for example vertical binning by 2 is combined with horizontal binning by 4 the widths of the imaged objects will appear shrunk by a factor of 2 compared to the heights If yo
275. olves making some additional software related steps and settings For more information see the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit The Event Queue As mentioned in the example above the camera has an event queue The intention of the queue is to handle short term delays in the camera s ability to access the network and send event messages When event notification is working smoothly a single event will be placed in the queue and this event will be sent to the PC in an event message before the next event is placed in the queue If there is an occasional short term delay in event message transmission the queue can buffer several events and can send them within a single event message as soon as transmission time is available However if you are operating the camera at high frame rates the camera may be able to generate and queue events faster than they can be transmitted and acknowledged In this case The queue will fill and an event overrun will occur Events will be dropped Setting Your System for Event Notification Event notification must be enabled in the camera and some additional software related settings must be made This is described in the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit Event notification must be specifically set up for each type of event using the parameter names of event and supplementary information The following table lists the relevan
276. on camera reset or at counter reset To enable the timestamp chunk 1 Use the Chunk Selector to select the Timestamp chunk 2 Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the timestamp chunk is enabled and Chunk Mode Active is enabled the camera will append a timestamp chunk to each acquired image After an image with an appended chunk has been received by your PC the chunk must be retrieved For information about retrieving data chunks see Section 8 18 4 on page 303 You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to activate the chunk mode and enable the timestamp chunk make chunk mode active and enable Timestamp chunk camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector Timestamp camera ChunkEnable SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Camera Software Suite and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 299 Features AW00123404000 8 18 3 5 Counter Value Chunk The counter value chunk feature numbers items sequentially as they occur When the feature is enabled a chunk is added to each image containing the value of the counter The counter value used for the chunk is taken from the currently active counter and relates to the
277. only select sequencer sets but also load them into the active set D Due to signal processing and transmission there is an unspecified delay between issuing the command and the sequencer set loading Accordingly the number of image acquisitions that may occur between sending the software command and it becoming effective can t be predicted We therefore strongly discourage using an asynchronous sequencer set advance trigger source for real time applications D If you use a software signal to trigger sequencer set advance for path 1 you can skip sequencer sets with regard to image acquisition by triggering sequencer set advance at a higher rate than the current frame acquisition rate Skipping is possible because sequencer set advance triggered by software signals is asynchronous i e is not tied to frame start triggers see also Table 40 and use case 3 Basler ace USB 3 0 221 Features AW00123404000 8 6 3 Sequencer Configuration 8 6 3 1 General Information When configuring the sequencer the following rules apply Required parameter values Sequencer Set Start values must always be set to 0 This ensures that sequencer set 0 is always the first set available for image acquisition after sequencer start or reset The Sequencer Trigger Activation parameter must always be set to Level High positive logic The other path related parameter values must differ between paths 0 and 1 in particular the Se
278. or example the adjustment of red affects the colors in the image with a predominant red component For the color adjustments to work properly the white balance must be correct See Section 7 3 1 on page 182 for more information about the white balance and see Section 7 3 5 on page 193 for an overall procedure for setting the color enhancement features Although color adjustment can be used without also using a light source preset we nonetheless strongly recommend to use both in combination if a suitable light source preset if available This will allow you to make full use of the camera s color enhancement capabilities If no suitable light source preset is available you can perform the desired color corrections using the color transformation matrix See Section 7 3 4 on page 191 for more information about the color transformation matrix If color binning is enabled for the acA1920 25uc or acA2500 14uc color adjustment will be applied after color binning was performed For more information about color binning see Section 8 7 2 on page 245 186 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement The RGB Color Space The RGB color space includes light with the primary colors red green and blue and all of their combinations When red green and blue light are combined and when the intensities of R G and B are allowed to vary independently between 0 and 100 all colors within
279. order to avoid loosing an external trigger signal make sure its pulse width will be long enough to provide sufficient time for the camera s input circuit to react The minimum required pulse width will be longer for the opto isolated input line compared to a GPIO line and for a trigger signal using the active low state for triggering compared to a trigger signal using the active high state As a general rule of thumb an external trigger pulse width of 100 us should be long enough for most cases 70 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface Analog external signal mem mimm umm Internal line status logical levels HIGH Voltage region considered to indicate a high internal logical level LOW Voltage region considered to indicate a low internal logical level Fast edge 1 Transition threshold t Propagation delay for the low high line status change PLH teur Propagation delay for the high low line status change Drawing not to scale g o Q 2 2 e HIGH 2 o gt DL lt LOW 0 2 x amp 1 Opto isolated IN peese esses eos S245 EE sees i Seenaa l T i E f 2 L g E s Direct coupled GPIO IN M a a 1 n H o S i c o f Time 3 3 24 VDC for opto isolated input gt 2 0 5 0 VDC for direct coupled GPIO IN Fig 41 Analog External Signal and Associated Internal L
280. ore information about controlling exposure time when using a hardware trigger see Section 6 4 3 on page 118 6 4 1 3 Setting The Frame Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters You can set the Trigger Mode and related parameter values for the frame start trigger from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API If your settings make it necessary you can also set the Trigger Source parameter The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger to on and the Trigger Source to input line Line 1 Select the frame start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the trigger mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode to continuous the Trigger Mode to off and the Acquisition Frame Rate to 60 Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the frame start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTime SetValue 3000 0 Enable the acquisition
281. owever require that red green and blue pixel values are available for each pixel To meet this requirement automatic demosaicing is executed on the raw data before any color enhancement feature will process pixel data The automatic process is also called a color transformation from RGB color space to RGB color space Note All color enhancements described in this section are performed on pixel data in RGB color space regardless of the pixel format chosen for pixel data output to the PC 7 3 1 Balance White The balance white feature allows you to perform white balancing The feature acts on data triplets that are available for each pixel and reside in the RGB color space So the feature lets you perform red green and blue adjustments for each pixel such that white objects in the camera s field of view appear white in the acquired images after color binning was performed For more information about color binning see If color binning is enabled for the acA1920 25uc white balancing will be applied Section 8 7 2 on page 245 182 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement Setting the White Balance adjusted manually i e by setting the value of the Balance Ratio parameters for D This section Section 7 3 1 describes how a color camera s white balance can be red green and blue The camera also has a Balance White Auto function that can automatically adjust the white balance M
282. pection camera Assume that the system operators want to acquire images of 3 specific areas on each object that the conveyor speed varies and that they do not want to acquire images when there is no object in front of the camera A sensing device on the conveyor could be used in conjunction with a PC to determine when an object is starting to pass the camera When an object is starting to pass the PC will execute a frame burst start trigger software command causing the camera to exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status An electrical device attached to the conveyor could be used to generate frame start trigger signals and to apply them to input line Line 1 on the camera Assuming that this electrical device was based on aposition encoder it could account for the speed changes in the conveyor and ensure that frame trigger signals are generated and applied when specific areas of the object are in front of the camera Once 3 frame start trigger signals have been received by the camera the number of frames acquired would be equal to the setting for the Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter and the camera would return to the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status Any frame start trigger signals generated at that point would be ignored This sort of setup is useful because it will only acquire frames when there is an object in front of the c
283. ply a frame start trigger signal to the camera when it is not ready to receive the signal it will be ignored and a frame start overtrigger event will be reported Basler ace USB 3 0 155 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Figure 72 illustrates the Frame Trigger Wait signal on a camera with a global shutter The camera is set for the trigger width exposure mode with rising edge triggering and with exposure and readout overlapped Frame Trigger Wait Signal ExFSTrig Signal zz ZA Frame Acquisition N Exposure Sensor Readout NN Sensor Readout Frame Acquisition N 1 Exposure A Frame Acquisition N 2 Exposure Sensor Readout Fig 72 Frame Trigger Wait Signal Time Camerais in a waiting for frame start trigger status The frame trigger wait signal will only be available when hardware frame start triggering is enabled For more information about event notification see Section 8 13 on page 277 For more information about hardware triggering see Section 6 3 5 on page 109 and Section 6 4 3 on page 118 156 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Frame Trigger Wait Signal Details All Models Except acA1920 25um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc acA4600 10uc When the camera is set for the timed exposure mode the rise of the F
284. point the changes you make to the Trigger Mode Trigger Source etc will be applied to the selected trigger only Exposure Time Control As mentioned earlier when a frame start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will begin to acquire a frame A critical aspect of frame acquisition is how long the pixels in the camera s sensor will be exposed to light during the frame acquisition If the camera is set for software frame start triggering a parameter called the Exposure Time will determine the exposure time for each frame If the camera is set for hardware frame start triggering there are two modes of operation timed and trigger width With the timed mode the Exposure Time parameter will determine the exposure time for each frame With the trigger width mode the way that you manipulate the rise and fall of the hardware signal will determine the exposure time The trigger width mode is especially useful if you want to change the exposure time from frame to frame acA1920 155um uc acA2500 14um uc acA3800 14um uc and D Trigger width exposure mode is not available on acA1920 25um uc acA4600 10um uc cameras 100 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 2 Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode Executing an Acquisition Start command prepares the camera to acquire frames You must execute an Acquisition Start command before you can begin acquiring fra
285. quencer Trigger Source parameter value We recommend to first set the path specific sequencer trigger sources for sequencer set 0 and then the path specific sequencer trigger sources for the other sequencer sets Each sequencer set must include exactly one subset of parameter values relating to path 0 and exactly one subset relating to path 1 This ensures that each sequencer set knows what role to play within each path i e within each sequencer set advance scheme Additional rules for configuring sequencer set 0 For Sequencer Set 0 the Sequencer Set Next value must be set to path 0 In addition the Sequencer Set Next value must be set to Sequencer Set 1 for path 1 in order to be able to leave user set 0 during image acquisition and to realize the application described in Section 8 6 4 on page 226 Additional rules for configuring sequencer sets for path 1 The sequencer sets must be configured in order of ascending and consecutive index numbers For all sequencer sets except for the one with the highest index number The Sequencer Set Next parameter value set for sequencer set J must always be set to sequencer set index number J 1 For example for path 1 used with sequencer set 2 the Sequencer Set Next parameter value must be set to 3 For the sequencer set with the highest index number The Sequencer Set Next parameter value for path 1 used with the sequencer set with the highest index number must be set to 0 For example if fo
286. r when frame acquisition is triggered exposure begins for all lines in the sensor as shown in Figure 57 Exposure continues for all lines in the sensor until the programmed exposure time ends or when the frame start trigger signal ends the exposure time if the camera is using the trigger width exposure mode At the end of the exposure time exposure ends for all lines in the sensor Immediately after the end of exposure pixel data readout begins and proceeds in a linewise fashion until all pixel data is read out of the sensor A main characteristic of a global shutter is that for each frame acquisition all of the pixels in the sensor start exposing at the same time and all stop exposing at the same time This means that image brightness tends to be more uniform over the entire area of each acquired image and it helps to minimize problems with acquiring images of objects in motion The cameras can provide an exposure active output signal that will go high when the exposure time for the first line begins and will go low when the exposure time for the last line ends You can determine the readout time for a frame by checking the value of the camera s Sensor Readout Time parameter 130 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Frame Start Triggered Lne1 See ln See G Line 3 UR Lne4 SSS Cdn Lne5 UU BN Linee UU E iin C Ue E Line 8 UU Lineo Ue Line 10 UT line UU E e e e e e
287. r SetValue 0 Select path 0 for the selected sequencer set camera SequencerPathSelector SetValue 0 Select the sequencer set that will be applied after the current sequencer set camera SequencerSetNext SetValue 0 Select the trigger source for sequencer set advance camera SequencerTriggerSource SetValue SequencerTriggerSource Line 3 Select the logic for the sequencer set advance trigger source for path O always LevelHigh camera SequencerTriggerActivation SetValue SequencerTriggerActivation LevelHigh Select path 1 for the selected sequencer set camera SequencerPathSelector SetValue 1 Select the sequencer set that will be applied after the current sequencer set camera SequencerSetNext SetValue 1 Select the trigger source for sequencer set advance camera SequencerTriggerSource SetValue SequencerTriggerSource Line 4 Select the logic for the sequencer set advance trigger source for path 1 always LevelHigh camera SequencerTriggerActivation SetValue SequencerTriggerActivation LevelHigh Save the camera parameter values and the sequencer set related parameter values for the selected sequencer set camera SequencerSetSave Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer
288. r becomes effective after some delay loading sequencer set 3 into the active set The fourth Software Signal 3 trigger becomes effective after some delay loading sequencer set 0 into the active set starting a new cycle of sequencer sets When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 0 is present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera Note that sequencer set 3 was skipped for frame acquisition The fifth Software Signal 3 trigger is sent It will however only later become effective When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 0 is present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The fifth Software Signal 3 trigger becomes effective after some delay loading sequencer set 1 into the active set 240 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features The first Software Signal 1 trigger is sent It will however only later become effective When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 1 is present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The first Software Signal 1 trigger becomes effective after some delay loading sequencer set 0 into the active set and thereby resetting the cycling through the sequencer sets When the next frame star
289. r image acquisition can cause color shifts in the image You can correct for the specific color shifts due to a specific light source by selecting the related light source preset You can correct for the following kinds of light sources Off No light source preset is selected and no gamma correction value will automatically be applied We recommend setting the gamma parameter value to 0 41667 This setting will adjust the pixel values for display on an sRGB monitor without however taking account of a specific light source Daylight 5000 K This setting will make appropriate corrections for images captured with daylight lighting that has a color temperature of about 5000K When you select this setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a daylight light source with a color temperature of about 5000K This correction will be set as the default after camera reset or power up Daylight 6500 K This setting will make appropriate corrections for images captured with daylight lighting that has a color temperature of about 6500K When you select this setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a daylight light source with a color temperature of about 6500K Tungsten 2800 K This setting will make appropriate corrections for images captured with tungsten lighting that has a colo
290. r temperature of about 2500K to 3000K When you select this setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a tungsten incandescent light source See Section 7 3 1 on page 182 for more information about the white balance Section 7 3 3 on page 186 for more information about color adjustment and Section 7 3 5 on page 193 for an overall procedure for setting the color enhancement features O For the light source presets to work properly the white balance must be correct 184 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement source preset page 259 When using a light source preset for a color camera a gamma correction value of approximately 0 4 will automatically be applied corresponding to an SRGB gamma correction value Under these circumstances we recommend not to explicitly set a gamma correction value If you do nonetheless you will alter the effect of the selected light If you select Off as the light source preset no gamma correction value will automatically be applied For more information about the gamma correction feature see Section 8 11 on The correction for a specific light source uses a color transformation matrix that is automatically populated by coefficients color transformation values suitable for the set light source The color transformation values modify color specific gain for
291. r values cannot be configured for user sets Sequencer parameters The parameter values in the active set can be changed almost instantaneously by loading a sequencer set The current set is the sequencer set whose parameter values were loaded into the active set with the latest sequencer set advance The parameter values remain in the active set until they are replaced by the parameter values of the next sequencer set The sequencer parameters can be divided into two types see Figure 86 Camera parameters for camera control e g exposure time gain ROI position and size see also Section 8 6 2 1 Sequencer set related parameters for sequencer control The parameters define the details of advancing from one sequencer set to the next This includes the possibility of choosing between different paths for advance thus allowing to choose between different sequencer sets see Figure 86 and Section 8 6 2 2 Basler ace USB 3 0 215 Features Sequencer set J Path 0 Path 1 0 H1 Trigger Source Line 3 Line 4 Level High Camera parameter values Sequencer set related parameter values Sequencer Set Next Sequencer Set Next Trigger Source Level High AW00123404000 Fig 86 Sequencer Parameters of Sequencer Set with Index Number J Most Parameter Values as Examples 8 6 2 1 Camera Parameters Each sequencer set controls the parameter values for the following camera parameters PixelFormat
292. rSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set for the timed exposure mod camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timeg Set th xposure tim camera ExposureTime SetValue 3000 0 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a Trigger Software command to apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera camera TriggerSoftware Execute Retrieve acquired frame here camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to FrameStart executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software frame start trigger signal to the camera You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 117 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 4 3 Using a Hardware Frame Start Trigger 6 4 3 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to Line 1 an externally generated electrical signal injected into physical input line Line 1 on the camera will act as the frame start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external frame start trigger si
293. ra TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed camera ExposureTime SetValue 3000 0 camera AcquisitionStart Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 102 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control 6 3 The Frame Burst Start Trigger When reading this section it is helpful to refer to Figure 49 on page 99 The frame burst start trigger is used in conjunction with the frame start trigger to control the acquisition of frames In essence the frame burst start trigger is used as an enabler for the frame start trigger Frame burst start trigger signals can be generated within the camera or may be applied externally as software or hardware frame burst start trigger signals When the frame burst start trigger is enabled the camera s initial acquisition status is waiting for frame burst start trigger When the camera is in this acquisition status it will ignore any frame start trigger signals it receives If a frame burst start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status In this acquisition s
294. ra supplies a flash window output signal to facilitate the use of flash lighting For more information about the exposure active output signal see Section 6 8 1 on page 148 For more information about the Exposure Time parameter see Section 6 5 on page 127 For more information about the flash window see Section 6 6 2 1 on page 138 Basler ace USB 3 0 137 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Setting the Shutter Mode The camera s shutter has two operating modes electronic rolling shutter mode and global reset release mode The shutter will operate in the electronic rolling shutter mode whenever the electronic rolling shutter mode is set When the global reset release mode is set the shutter will operate in global reset release mode You can set the shutter mode from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the shutter modes Set the electronic rolling shutter mode camera ShutterMode SetValue ShutterMode_Rolling Set the global reset release shutter mod camera ShutterMode SetValue ShutterMode_GlobalResetRelease You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the mode 6 6 2 1 The Flash Window Flash Window in Electronic Rolling Shutter Mode If you are using the electronic rolling shutter mode capturing images of moving objects requires the use of flash exposure If you don t use flash exposure w
295. rame Trigger Wait signal is based on the current Exposure Time parameter setting and on when readout of the current frame will end This functionality is illustrated in Figure 73 If you are operating the camera in the timed exposure mode you can avoid overtriggering by always making sure that the Frame Trigger Wait signal is high before you trigger the start of frame capture Frame Trig Wait Signal ExFSTrig Signal Frame Acquisition N Exposure Sensor Readout e d end of frame readout and on the current Exposure Time parameter setting e a Exp Time Setting Frame Acquisition N 1 Exposure Sensor Readout D ML r Exp Time Setting Frame Acquisition N 2 Exposure Sensor Readout r i Time Camerais in a waiting for frame start trigger status Fig 73 Frame Trigger Wait Signal with the Timed Exposure Mode Basler ace USB 3 0 157 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 When the camera is set for the trigger width exposure mode the rise of the Frame Trigger Wait signal is based on the Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter setting and on when readout of the current frame will end This functionality is illustrated in Figure 74 Frame Trig Wait Signal T Fl pP ExFSTrig Signal ZZ Z Z OA Frame Acquisition N The rise of the Frame Trigger Exposure Readout Wait signal is based on the end
296. rame acquisition Exposure start can also be controlled via an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal applied to an input line The ExFSTrig signal facilitates periodic or non periodic frame acquisition start During exposure electrical charges accumulate in the sensor s pixels After exposure was ended the accumulated charges are read out of the sensor At readout the charges are transported from the row s light sensitive elements pixels to the analog processing controls see Figure 31 on page 49 As the charges move through the analog controls they are converted to voltages proportional to the size of each charge Each voltage is then amplified by a Variable Gain Control VGC Next the voltages are digitized by an Analog to Digital converter ADC After the voltages have been amplified and digitized they are passed through the sensor s digital controls for additional signal processing The digitized pixel data leaves the sensor passes through an FPGA and moves into a buffer The pixel data leaves the buffer and passes back through the FPGA to a controller where it is assembled into data packets The packets are then transmitted by bulk transfer via a USB 3 compliant cable to a USB 3 host adapter of the host PC The controller also handles transmission and receipt of control data such as changes to the camera s parameters CMOS Sensor Pixel Array 1 Analo
297. rameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on the camera will initially be in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and cannot react to frame start trigger signals You must apply a frame burst start trigger signal to the camera to exit the camera from the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera can then react to frame start trigger signals and will continue to do so until the number of frame start trigger signals it has received is equal to the current Basler ace USB 3 0 103 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter setting The camera will then return to the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status In order to acquire more frames you must apply a new frame burst start trigger signal to the camera to exit it from the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on you must select a source signal to serve as the frame burst start trigger The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply a frame burst start trigger signal to the camera by executing a Trigger Software command for the frame burst start trigger on the host PC Software Sig
298. rameter value camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Line2 camera LineSource SetValue LineSource FrameTriggerWait You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about changing the selection of an output signal as the source signal for the output line see Section 5 12 1 on page 80 For more information about the electrical characteristics of camera output lines see Section 5 8 1 on page 60 and Section 5 9 3 1 on page 67 6 8 5 Camera Events Certain camera events allow you to get informed about the current camera acquisition status FrameBurstStartEvent event A frame burst start trigger has occurred FrameStartEvent event A frame start trigger has occurred ExposureEndEvent event The end of an exposure has occurred For more information about the camera events and event notification see Section 8 13 on page 277 Basler ace USB 3 0 161 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 9 Acquisition Timing Chart Figure 76 shows a timing chart for frame acquisition and transmission The chart assumes that exposure is triggered by an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal with rising edge activation and that the camera is set for the timed exposure mode As Figure 76 shows there is a slight delay between the rise of the ExFSTrig signal and the start
299. range from 0 00 to 15 99976 But you should be aware that if you setthe balance ratio for a color to a value lower than 1 this will not only decrease the intensity of that color relative to the other two colors but will also decrease the maximum intensity that the color can achieve For this reason we don t normally recommend setting a balance ratio less than 1 unless you want to correct for the strong predominance of one color To set the Balance Ratio parameter value for color using Basler pylon 1 Set the Balance Ratio Selector to red green or blue 2 Setthe Balance Ratio parameter to the desired value for the selected color You can set the Balance Ratio Selector and the Balance Ratio parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value for green as an example Basler ace USB 3 0 183 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00123404000 Select the color for white balancing and set the related BalanceRatio value camera BalanceRatioSelector SetValue BalanceRatioSelector_Green camera BalanceRatio SetValue 1 25 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 7 3 2 Light Source Presets According to its specific spectral characteristics color temperature the light used fo
300. rated by the camera would result in frame acquisitions At that point the number of frames acquired would be equal to the setting for the Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter The camera would return to the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and would no longer react to frame start trigger signals It would remain in this condition until the next car enters the booth area and activates the sensing device This sort of setup is very useful for traffic system applications because multiple frames can be acquired with only a single frame burst start trigger signal and because frames will not be acquired when there are no cars passing through the booth this avoids the need to store images of an empty toll booth area For more information about the Acquisition Frame Rate parameter see Section 6 3 1 1 on page 103 172 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case Fame Burst Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger Off The frame burst start trigger is on and the frame burst start trigger source is set to input line Line 1 The user must apply a frame burst start trigger signal to Line 1 to make the camera exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status Because the acquisition burst frame count is set to 3 the camera will re enter the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status after 3 frames have been acquired The frame start trigger is off The camera will g
301. rection can account for the kind of light source used during image acquisition and compensate for imperfections in the sensor s color generation process D Color correction by means of the color transformation matrix is intended for use by only someone who is thoroughly familiar with matrix color transformations It is nearly impossible to enter correct values in the transformation matrix by trial and error D For color transformation to work properly the white balance must be correct See Section 7 3 1 on page 182 for more information about the white balance and see Section 7 3 5 on page 193 for an overall procedure for setting the color enhancement features Although the color transformation matrix can be used without using a light source preset we nonetheless strongly recommend to also use the suitable light source preset if available to make full use of the camera s color enhancement capabilities If no suitable light source preset is available you can perform the desired color corrections using the color transformation matrix If color binning is enabled for the acA1920 25ucor and acA2500 14 the color transformation matrix will be applied after color binning was performed For more information about color binning see Section 8 7 2 on page 245 Basler ace USB 3 0 191 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00123404000 The Color Transformation Matrix The color transformation feature proce
302. rigger signal AL Frame Burst Start Trigger Software Command Executed Frame Start Trigger Sig applied to Line 1 Fig 80 Use camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout frame transmission a frame start trigger signal that will be ignored because the camera is not in a waiting for frame start trigger status Acquisition Start Command Executed MRNA XXX XXX ZA UA nal Time Case 4 Frame Burst Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger On Basler ace USB 3 0 Acquisition Stop Command Executed 19 470 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 6 070 0 0 05 ERRELE 175 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 176 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement 7 Color Creation and Enhancement This chapter provides information about how color images are created on different camera models and about the features available for adjusting the appearance of the colors T 1 Color Creation The sensors in the color versions of the Basler ace USB 3 0 cameras are equipped with an additive color separation filter known as a Bayer filter The pixel formats available on color cameras for pixel data output are related to the Bayer pattern You therefore need a basic knowledge of the Bayer filter to understand the pixel formats With the Bayer filter each individual pixel is covered by a part of the filter that allows light of only one color to strike the p
303. riggers sequencer set advance Line 3 for path 0 triggers reset of sequencer set advance trigger signal generated externally v camera loads a sequencer set into the active set and thus makes it the current sequencer set current sequencer set present in the active set immediately before the sequencer feature is enabled oO Current sequencer set that is used for image acquisition sequencer set was just loaded Current sequencer set that is used for image acquisition already present in the active set n current sequencer set sequencer set was already in the active set before it was overwritten by sequencer set 1 sequencer set was just loaded again camera is waiting for a frame start trigger 4 frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequencer Mode Set to Mode Set to On Off Line 3 GPIO Trigger Source Path 0 Line 4 GPIO EN Trigger Source v v v v v v v v v v v T mg B u H H bo B H H Um Frame Start jJ I IJ JL JL Trigger Signal c EH EEE E E E EE NES NES ENS M I Time Fig 88 Use Case 1 Synchronous Cycling Through Sequencer Sets According to Path 1 No Reset Basler ace USB 3 0 233 Features AW00123404000 Use Case 2 Sequencer Set Advance Based on Counter 2 End One Reset Use case two is illustra
304. rofile parameter to specify whether gain or exposure time will be minimized during automatic adjustments 2 Set the value of the Gain Auto parameter to the continuous mode of operation 3 Set the value of the Exposure Auto parameter to the continuous mode of operation You can set the auto function profile from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the auto function profile As an example Gain Auto is set to be minimized during adjustments Use Gain Auto and Exposure Auto simultaneously camera AutoFunctionProfile SetValue AutoFunctionProfile_MinimizeGain camera GainAuto SetValue GainAuto_Continuous camera ExposureAuto SetValue ExposureAuto_Continuous You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 274 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 12 7 Balance White Auto Balance White Auto is the automatic counterpart to manually setting the white balance The balance white auto function is only available on color models Automatic white balancing is a two step process First the Balance Ratio parameter values for red green and blue are each set to 1 5 Then assuming a gray world model the Balance Ratio parameter values are automatically adjusted such that the average values for the re
305. rt trigger acquisition status Once the camera has acquired 3 frames it will re enter the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status Before any more frames can be acquired a new rising edge must be applied to input line 1 to make the camera exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status Because the frame start trigger is set to off the user does not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera The camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally The rate at which the frame start trigger signals will be generated is normally determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate parameter If the Acquisition Frame Rate parameter is disabled the camera will acquire frames at the maximum allowed frame rate This type of camera setup is used frequently in intelligent traffic systems With these systems a typical goal is to acquire several images of a car as it passes through a toll booth A sensing device is usually placed at the start of the toll booth area When a car enters the area the sensing device applies an electrical signal to input line 1 on the camera When the electrical signal is received on input line 1 it serves as a frame burst start trigger signal and the camera exits from the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enters a waiting for frame trigger acquisition status In our example the next 3 frame start trigger signals internally gene
306. s 7 How often did does the problem fr Once fr Every time occur Regularly when Occasionally when Basler ace USB 3 0 307 Troubleshooting and Support AW00123404000 8 10 11 308 How severe is the problem Camera can still be used Camera can be used after take this action Camera can no longer be used Did your application ever run r Yes r No without problems Parameter set It is very important for Basler technical support to get a copy of the exact camera parameters that you were using when the problem occurred To make note of the parameters use the Basler pylon Viewer If you cannot access the camera please try to state the following parameter settings Image Size ROI Pixel Format r Exposure Time r Frame Rate Live image test image If you are having an image problem try to generate and save live images that show the problem Also generate and save test images Please save the images in BMP format zip them and send them to Basler technical support Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Revision History Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00123401000 04 Jun 2013 Initial release of the document Applies to prototypes only AW00123402000 16 Apr 2014 First release of this document for series cameras and some prototype cameras Updated Asian contact information Updated
307. s 8 7 2 Binning on Color Cameras acA1920 25uc and acA2500 14uc Only The acA1920 25uc and acA2500 14uc color cameras allow you to realize color binning where pixel values for identical colors are binned vertically and or horizontally With vertical color binning the gray values of adjacent pixels of the same color from 2 rows 3 rows or a maximum of 4 rows in the imaging sensor array are averaged and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel The number of binned pixels depends on the vertical color binning setting see the example in Figure 93 As the gray values are averaged during vertical color binning and not summed the signal to noise ratio will be increased while the camera s response to light will not be increased Example Vertical Color Binning by 2 Shown for 2 Columns Fig 93 Vertical Color Binning by 2 With horizontal color binning the gray values of adjacent pixels of the same color from 2 columns 3 columns or a maximum of 4 columns in the imaging sensor array are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel The number of binned pixels depends on the horizontal color binning setting see example in Figure 94 qa Ee E Sirf fr Example Horizontal Color Binning by 2 Shown for 2 Rows ne lt Ill IBI niic Fig 94 Horizontal Color Binning by 2 Basler ace USB 3 0 245 Features AW00123404000 Combining Horizontal and Vertical C
308. s Requirements and Precautions 0 4 Quantum Efficiency e 0 0 400 500 600 700 Wavelength nm Fig 21 acA3800 14uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 0 6 0 5 Quantum Efficiency o DV 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 Wavelength nm Fig 22 acA4600 10uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Basler ace USB 3 0 25 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 1 4 Mechanical Specifications The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 assuming that the lens mount is covered by a lens or by the plastic cap that is shipped with the camera 1 4 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points The dimensions in millimeters for cameras equipped with a C mount are as shown in Figure 23 The dimensions in millimeters for cameras equipped with a CS mount are as shown in Figure 24 Camera housings are equipped with mounting screw holes on the bottom as shown in the drawings For mounting instructions see Section 1 5 on page 31 26 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions wo 2 x NEL ND 23 7 dimension for M3 y ti i Q OJ o i s a i Bottom i S oy WN 3xM3 3 deep N 1 g
309. s Counter Duration setting The cycling is synchronous because the counting of Counter 2 is linked to the frame start triggers When a sequencer set has Counter 2 End as the trigger source for sequencer set advance the related frame start triggers will be counted by Counter 2 and the sequencer set will be applied to the frame acquisitions The same sequencer set will be applied to the following frame acquisitions until the set end of Counter 2 counting is reached The end of counting is set by the Counter Duration parameter value applicable to Counter 2 When the end is reached the counting will resume with number one for the next frame start trigger and will apply to the next sequencer set As the receding series of frame acquisitions before the new series of frame acquisitions will be subject to Counter 2 counting and the Counter Duration parameter value 234 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Use Case Two in Detail Assuming that the sequencer sets are configured according to Table 42 on page 234 and the camera is not acquiring images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the Sequencer Mode parameter value is set to On the sequencer feature becomes enabled for the application of sequencer sets during image acquisitions The transitional dummy sequencer set with index number 1 is loaded into the active set overwriting the previous sequencer parameter values Section 8 6 2 on page 215 When a frame start trigger sign
310. s and corrections throughout the manual relating to former prototype cameras Added information for former prototype cameras acA2000 165 acA2040 90 acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 throughout the manual Added new prototype cameras acA645 100um uc acA1920 155um uc Replaced lens adapter by lens mount and cylindric housing extension throughout the manual Added precautions related to SELV LPS requirements for power supplies in Section 1 on page 1 and Section 5 on page 51 Basler ace USB 3 0 309 Revision History AW00123404000 Doc ID Number Date Changes cont d Removed pixel formats RGB 8 and BGR 8 from Table 4 on page 7 Modified the sensor size for the acA1600 20um in Section 1 2 on page 2 Removed the availability of CS mounts for acA1920 20um uc cameras in Section 1 2 on page 2 and added a related note in Section 1 4 1 on page 26 Indicated UL certification for cameras in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added a note about the availability of CE conformity declarations to the tables in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added information about the availability of pylon for Linux in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added information about mechanical stress tests in Section 1 6 on page 33 Added max ambient temperature UL 60950 1 in Section 1 9 1 on page 36 Added information in Section 2 on page 41 and Section 6 10 on page 165 about restricted initial maximum allowed acquisition frame rates for acA2000 165u and acA2040
311. s for the 6 pin Connector and Related Designations 52 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 2 2 USB3 0 Micro B Port Pin Numbering and Assignments The USB 3 0 Micro B port provides a USB 3 0 connection to supply power to the camera and to transmit video data and control signals Pin numbering and pin assignments adhere to the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 standard 5 3 Camera Connector Types 5 3 14 6 pin Connector The 6 pin connector on the camera is a Hirose micro receptacle part number HR10A 7R 6PB or the equivalent The recommended mating connector is the Hirose micro plug part number HR10A 7P 6S or the equivalent Contact your Basler sales representative to order cable assemblies 5 3 2 USB 3 0 Micro B Port The USB 3 0 Micro B port for the camera s USB 3 0 connection is a standard Micro B USB 3 0 connector with screw lock The recommended mating connector is any standard Micro B USB 3 0 plug Suitable cables terminated with screw lock connectors are available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order cable assemblies 5 4 LED Indicator There is a green LED indicator on the back of the camera housing see Figure 34 When the LED is lit it indicates that the camera is operating Basler ace USB 3 0 53 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 5 Camera Cabling Requirements Note We highly recommend using USB 3 0 and I O cables that are offered as Basler accessories Th
312. s is either Bayer BG Bayer GB or Bayer RG see Table 32 Bayer BG alignment for example means that pixel one and pixel two of the first line in each image transmitted will be blue and green respectively And for the second line transmitted pixel one and pixel two will be green and red respectively Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed you can use this information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image The Pixel Color Filter parameter indicates the alignment of the Bayer filter to the pixels in the images as applies to your camera model Because the size and position of the region of interest on color cameras with a Bayer filter must be adjusted in increments of 2 the color filter alignment will remain as Bayer BG or Bayer GB regardless of the camera s region of interest ROI settings For more information about the camera s ROI feature see Section 8 5 on page 207 178 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Color Creation and Enhancement 7 1 2 Pixel Formats Available on Color Cameras On color cameras the following pixel formats are available for the output of color images Color Camera Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer RGB BGR YCbCr Model BG8 GB8 RG8 BG GB RG BG GB RG 8 8 422 8 12 12 12 12p 12p 12p acA640 90uc e e e e acA640 120uc e 9 e acA645 100uc e e e e 9 acA1300 30uc e e e e e
313. s of virtual columns and lines i e the settings for an Auto Function ROI will refer to the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the sensor as they normally would D Normally the Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameter settings for an Auto For more information about the concept of a virtual sensor see Section 8 7 4 on page 247 You can select an Auto Function ROI and set the Offset X Offset X Width and Height parameter values for the Auto Function ROI from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to select an Auto Function ROI and to get the maximum allowed settings for the Width and Height parameters The code snippets also Basler ace USB 3 0 267 Features AW00123404000 illustrate setting the Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameter values As an example Auto Function ROI 1 is selected Select the appropriate auto function ROI for gain auto and exposure auto control Currently auto function ROI1 is predefined to gather the pixel data needed for gain auto and exposure auto control Set the position and size of the auto function ROI Note The code uses AOI instead of ROI For example ROI1 is named AOI1 in the code 1 camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI1 camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue
314. se horizontal binning by 3 and vertical binning by 3 the effective resolution of the sensor is reduced to 219 H by 164 V Binning s Effect on ROI Settings When you have the camera set to use binning keep in mind that the settings for your image region of interest ROI will refer to the binned rows and columns in the sensor and not to the physical rows and columns in the sensor as they normally would Another way to think of this is by using the concept of a virtual sensor For example assume that you are using an acA640 90um camera set for 3 by 3 binning as described above In this case you would act as if you were actually working with a 219 column by 164 row sensor when setting your ROI parameters The maximum ROI width would be 219 and the maximum ROI height would be 164 When you set the Offset X and the Width for the ROI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor columns And when you set the Offset Y and the Height for the ROI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor rows and columns For more information about the image region of interest ROI feature see Section 8 5 on page 207 Effective Image ROI and Effective Offset X and Offset Y Note that neither width nor height of the physical sensor used in the above example were evenly divisible by 3 Each division left a remainder of two Therefore the sensor resolution actually used for binning was 657 H x 492 V and the remaining two c
315. see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 79 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 12 Configuring Output Lines and Signals 5 12 1 Selecting a Source Signal for an Output Line To make a physical output line useful you must select a source signal for the line You can select output line Line 2 and GPIO lines Line 3 and Line 4 if configured for output The camera has several standard output signals available and any one of them can be selected to act as the source signal for an output line The camera has these standard output signals available Frame Burst Trigger Wait Frame Trigger Wait Exposure Active not available for acA3800 14 and acA4600 10 cameras Flash Window Timer 1 Active User Output 1 User Output 2 or User Output 3 depending on the output line For more information see Section 5 12 3 on page 84 To set a camera output signal as the source signal for an output line 1 Use the Line Selector to select for example output line Line 2 2 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to one of the available output signals or to user settable This will set the source signal for the output line The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the output line Line 2 camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Line2 Select the Flash Window signal as the source signal camera LineSource SetValue LineSource FlashWindow By default
316. sequence an ROI will display different images depending on whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled 252 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Normal Image Mirror Image eooocoocooo iy l ooco00coooccoocoo De tay i uu iN ROI ROI Fig 101 Using an ROI with Reverse X Mirror Imaging For color cameras provisions are made ensuring that the effective color filter alignment will be constant for normal and mirror images You can use the ROI feature when using the reverse X feature Note however that the position of an image ROI relative to the sensor remains the same regardless of whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled As a consequence an image ROI will display different images depending on whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled Auto function ROls will behave analogously to image ROls For more information about auto functions see Section 8 12 on page 261 Setting Reverse X You can enable or disable the reverse X feature by setting the ReverseX parameter value You can set the parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Enable reverse X camera ReverseX SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section
317. set overwriting the previous sequencer parameter values Section 8 6 2 on page 215 A trigger signal assigned to path 1 is received setting the signal level to high When the frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal assigned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer set that is sequencer set 0 into the active set Sequencer set 0 overwrites the parameter values of sequencer set 1 in the active set A frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 0 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes low The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes high When the next frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal assigned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer set that is sequencer set 1 into the active set The parameter values for sequencer set 1 overwrite the parameter values for sequencer set 0 in the active set A frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 1 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera 230 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes low The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes high When the next frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal assi
318. set advance called paths For more information about sequencer trigger sources sequencer set advance and paths see Section 8 6 2 2 The actual sequence of sequencer sets that will be loaded into the active set as images are acquired depends on the number of configured sequencer sets on the use of the sequencer trigger sources selected for path 0 and path 1 and on the use of the paths For more information about sequencer trigger sources and paths see Section 8 6 2 2 As mentioned in Section 8 6 2 2 paths 0 and path 1 play different roles The cycling through the available sequencer sets can be accomplished using the path 1 sequencer trigger source Using the path 0 sequencer trigger source will load sequencer set 0 into the active set This will reset the cycling and allow its restart frame start triggering allow sufficient time to elapse between the moment when the sequencer set advance trigger signal has reached the high status and the subsequent frame start trigger signal going high In particular consider the propagation delays associated with the camera s input lines To minimize propagation delays we recommend choosing the GPIO input lines as the sources for both the sequencer set advance trigger signal and the frame start trigger signal In this context we recommend not using the opto isolated input line unless robustness against EMI is required D To ensure reliable coordination between synchronous sequencer set advanc
319. sses red green and blue pixel data made available for each pixel Section 7 3 on page 182 and uses a transformation matrix to deliver modified red green and blue pixel data for each pixel The RGB to RGB color matrix transformation for each pixel is performed by premultiplying a 3 x 1 matrix containing R G and B pixel values by a 3 x 3 matrix containing color transformation values that modify color specific gain Gain00 Gain01 Gain02 R R Gain10 Gaini1 Gaini2 G G Gain20 Gain21 Gain22 B B is already populated with color transformation values They will correspond to unit vectors be related to previously set light source presets or result from a previous application of the color transformation feature When setting the transformation values you will find that the transformation matrix You can set each color transformation value according to your choice Each GainXY position can be populated with a floating point value ranging from 8 0 to 7 96875 by using the Color Transformation Value Selector to select one of the GainXY positions in the matrix and using the Color Transformation Value parameter to enter a value for that position and thereby replace the previous value A reference article that explains the basics of color matrix transformation for video data can be found at http www its bldrdoc gov publications 2437 aspx Setting Color Transformation Matrix Values You can set the Color Tra
320. ssible Limit SetValue 19 745 lower limit and the highest possible limit for the gain auto function For example toGainLowerLimit SetValue toGainLowerLimit GetMin toGainUpperLimit SetValue toGainUpperLimit GetMax target gray value for the selected auto function The parameter valu available range of gray values for the set pixel format if an 8 bit pixel format of 0 50196 will correspond to a gray value of 128 range refers to the theoretically maximum is set a parameter value camera AutoTargetBrightness SetValue 0 50196 Set the mode of operation for the gain auto function camera GainAuto SetValue GainAuto_Once You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 270 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features For general information about auto functions see Section 8 12 on page 261 For information about Auto Function ROIs and how to set them see Section 8 12 3 on page 263 8 12 5 Exposure Auto trigger width For more information about the trigger width exposure mode see D The exposure auto function will not work if the camera s exposure mode is set to Section 6 4 3 2 on page 119 Exposure Auto is the automatic counterpart to manually setting the Exposure Time parameter The
321. ssss 177 Color CUD Gs 5 ente etit 187 color enhancement ssse 182 procedure esee 193 color fidelity ee 193 color filter alignment 177 178 color hexagon seeeeeeeeeeeee 187 color Spaen eeoa aspra n iaeei 182 AGB AE T 187 color temperature 184 color transformation 191 color transformation matrix 185 191 color transformation value 192 311 Index connector G PIN tA Ree dee ce etic 52 pin assignments 0 ee eee ee eeeee tees 52 pin numbering eee 52 TYPO rsa iiis 53 CS MOUNT S468 aa ceased Keita 26 28 current Seb cette eet 215 D decimation see vertical decimation default user set factory setup 289 demosaicing eeessss 180 182 device firmware version parameter 284 device ID parameter 284 device manufacturer info parameter 284 device model name parameter 284 device scan type parameter 284 device user ID parameter 284 device vendor name parameter 284 device version parameter 284 digital Shift 201 12 bit pixel formats 201 8 bit pixel formats 203 initial checks sssuusse 205 missing codes
322. stallations provides much more detail about avoiding EMI and ESD This application note can be obtained from the Downloads section of our website www baslerweb com D The Basler application note called Avoiding EMI and ESD in Basler Camera Basler ace USB 3 0 35 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 1 9 Environmental Requirements 1 9 4 Temperature and Humidity Housing temperature during operation 0 C 50 C 32 F 122 F Housing temperature during operation for acA2000 165 and acA2040 90 only 0 C 60 C 32 F 140 F Housing temperature according to UL 60950 1 max 70 C 158 F Ambient temperature according to UL 60950 1 max 30 C 86 F UL 60950 1 test conditions no lens attached to the camera and without efficient heat dissipation ambient temperature kept at 30 C 86 F Humidity during operation 20 80 relative non condensing Storage temperature 20 C 80 C 4 F 176 F Storage humidity 20 80 relative non condensing 1 9 2 Heat Dissipation You must provide sufficient heat dissipation to maintain the camera housing temperature at the maximum value or below as specified for the camera during operation see above Since each installation is unique we only provide the following general guidelines In all cases you should monitor the temperature of the camera housing and make sure that the temperature does not exceed t
323. start trigger acquisition status When a new software frame burst start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will again exit from the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Note that as long as the Trigger Selector parameter is set to Frame Burst Start a software frame burst start trigger will be applied to the camera each time a Trigger Software command is executed Basler ace USB 3 0 107 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 3 4 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Burst Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software frame burst start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software frame burst start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when frame burst start triggering is on camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the frame burst start trigger camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameBurstStart Set the mode for the selected trigger camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the sel
324. strate setting the Offset X Offset Y Width and Height parameter values int64 t i camera WidthMax GetValue camera Width SetValue 1294 camera OffsetX SetValue 0 int64 t i camera HeightMax GetValue camera Height SetValue 964 212 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features camera OffsetY SetValue 0 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 8 5 1 Center X and Center Y The ROI feature also includes Center X and Center Y capabilities for horizontal and vertical centering When Center X is enabled the camera will automatically center the ROI along the sensor s X axis When Center Y is enabled the camera will automatically center the ROI along the sensor s Y axis When Center X is enabled the Offset X setting is adjusted accordingly and becomes read only Note When Center X is disabled the original Offset X setting that applied when Center X was enabled will not be automatically restored If you want to return to the original Offset X setting you will have to do so manually The Offset Y setting behaves analogously when Center Y is enabled and disabled Enabling ROI Centering You can enable ROI centering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to enable automa
325. t A new cycle of sequencer sets starts A frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 0 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes low The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes high When the next frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal assigned to path 1 is found to be high As a result the frame start trigger triggers the loading of the next sequencer set that is sequencer set 1 into the active set The parameter values for sequencer set 1 overwrite the parameter values for sequencer set 0 in the active set A frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 1 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 stays low When the next frame start trigger signal was received the trigger signal assigned to path 1 is found to be low As a result the frame start trigger does not trigger the loading of a new sequencer set The parameter values of sequencer set 1 remain in the active set Note that this frame acquisition illustrates how sequencer sets can be used in succession A frame acquisition is carried out using the parameter values of sequencer set 1 The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera The trigger signal assigned to path 1 stays low The trigger signal assigned to path 1 goes high When the next frame st
326. t any time to sequencer set 0 and therewith reset the cycling Setting the sequencer mode to Off will disable the sequencer feature for use with frame acquisitions The parameter values that were in the active set immediately before the sequencer feature was enabled will reappear in the active set and will overwrite the values of the latest sequencer set Effect on Frame Rate For all cameras except the acA1920 25 and acA2500 14 cameras the loading of sequencer sets into the camera s active set has no effect on the camera s frame rate as long as all image acquisitions are carried out along the same path i e along path 1 Switching between paths 0 and 1 can decrease the frame rate For the acA1920 25 and acA2500 14 cameras the loading of sequencer sets into the camera s active set will decrease the camera s frame rate The frame rate will however not decrease as long as no new sequencer set is loaded Using the sequencer feature will affect the frame rates of all cameras if dictated by parameter values that are controlled by sequencer sets ExposureTime AcquisitionFrameRate Basler ace USB 3 0 227 Features AW00123404000 Camera not acquiring im ages i e idle sequencer not operating Qo of A O RE 5 O Q o Q A o O0 o 5 3 g E 2 o s 9 n o o Q Ss 5 o S DY Bie Trigger for Trigger for path 1 equencer set 0 Sequencer set 1 ie fin the active set in the active set Cw Trig
327. t controller chipsets You can download the Quick Installation Guide from our website www baslerweb com Drivers and Tools for changing camera parameters are indicated in the next chapter Electric Shock Hazard Risk of Burn or Death The power supplies used for supplying power to the I O lines and camera power must meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and Limited Power Source LPS requirements If you use a powered hub as part of the USB 3 0 connection the powered hub must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Fire Hazard Risk of Burn The power supplies used for supplying power to the I O lines and camera power must meet the Limited Power Source LPS requirements If you use a powered hub as part of the USB 3 0 connection the powered hub must meet the LPS requirements When connected to a USB 2 0 port the Basler ace USB 3 0 camera will be D The camera is designed to be connected to a USB 3 0 port installed in your PC detected but will not operate Basler ace USB 3 0 41 Installation AW00123404000 D Note We highly recommend using components such as host adapters with specific chipsets cables and hubs that are offered as Basler accessories They were extensively tested for optimum performance For more information about recommended components see the Recommended Accessories for Basler USB 3 0 Cameras specification DGO001115 For downloading the specifi
328. t describe the individual auto functions 276 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 13 Event Notification The event notification feature is not available for the acA1920 155 camera When event notification is set to on the camera can generate an event and transmit a related event message to the PC whenever a specific situation has occurred The camera can generate and transmit events for the following types of situations A frame start trigger has occurred FrameStartEvent Overtriggering of the frame start trigger has occurred FrameStartOvertriggerEvent This happens if the camera receives a frame start trigger signal when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status If the frame start overtrigger event is only available when image acquisition is carried out using an external hardware trigger A frame burst start trigger has occurred FrameBurstStartEvent Overtriggering of the frame burst start trigger has occurred FrameBurstStartOvertriggerEvent This happens if the camera receives a frame burst start trigger signal when it is not in a waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status The end of an exposure has occurred ExposureEndEvent An Example of Event Notification An example related to the Frame Start Overtrigger event illustrates how event notification works The example assumes that your system is set for event notification see
329. t for falling edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExFSTrig signal falls Figure 51 illustrates timed exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering ExFSTrig Signal Period ExFSTrig Signal oC Exposure duration determined by the Exposure Time parameter Fig 51 Timed Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering Basler ace USB 3 0 119 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 Note that if you attempt to trigger a new exposure start while the previous exposure is still in progress the trigger signal will be ignored and a Frame Start Overtrigger event will be generated This situation is illustrated in Figure 52 for rising edge triggering This rise in the trigger signal will be ignored and a Frame Start Overtrigger event will be generated ExFSTrig Signal EN D Exposure duration determined by the Exposure Time parameter Fig 52 Overtriggering with Timed Exposure For more information about the Frame Start Overtrigger event see Section 8 13 on page 277 For more information about the camera s Exposure Time parameter see Section 6 5 on page 127 Trigger Width Exposure Mode acA640 90 acA640 120 acA645 100 acA1300 30 and acA1600 20 When trigger width exposure mode is selected the length of the exposure for each frame acquisition will be directly controlled by the ExFSTrig signal If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExFSTri
330. t parameter names 278 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Event Event Parameter Name Supplementary Information Parameter Name Frame Start FrameStartEventData FrameStartEventTimestamp Frame Start Overtrigger FrameStartOvertriggerEventData FrameStartOvertriggerEventTimestamp Frame Burst Start FrameBurstStartEventData FrameBurstStartEventTimestamp Frame Burst Start FrameBurstStartOvertriggerEventData FrameBurstStartOvertriggerEventTimestamp Overtrigger Exposure End ExposureEndEventData ExposureEndEventFramelD ExposureEndEventTimestamp Table 44 Parameter Names of Events and Supplementary Information You can enable event notification and make the additional settings from within your application software by using the pylon API The pylon 4 Camera Software Suite includes a Grab CameraEvents code sample that illustrates the entire process For more detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference Basler ace USB 3 0 279 Features AW00123404000 8 14 Test Images All cameras include the ability to generate test images Test images are used to check the camera s basic functionality and its ability to transmit an image to the host PC Test images can be used for service purposes and for failure diagnostics For test images the image is generated internally by the camera s logic and does not use the optics the imaging sensor
331. t the selector and the parameter value As an example the opto isolated output line Line 2 is selected and the minimum output pulse width is set to 10 0 us Select the output line camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Line2 Set the parameter value to 10 0 microseconds camera LineMinimumOutputPulseWidth SetValue 10 0 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 83 Physical Interface AW001 23404000 5 12 3 Setting the Status of An Individual User Settable Output Line As mentioned in the previous section you can designate a camera s output line as user settable by means of the UserOutput parameters If you have designated an output line as user settable you can use the UserOutputValue parameter to set the status of the output line For each output line a specific UserOutput parameter is available to set the line as user settable UserOutput 1 is available for output line Line 2 UserOutput 2 is available for GPIO line Line 3 if the line is configured for output UserOutput 3 is available for GPIO line Line 4 if the line is configured for output To set the status of a user settable output line 1 Use the User Output Selector to select for example outp
332. t trigger signal was received sequencer set 0 is present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 0 is present in the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera When the Sequencer Mode parameter value is set to Off the sequencer feature becomes disabled for the application of sequencer sets during image acquisitions The sequencer parameter values that were the current ones before the sequencer feature was enabled are loaded into the active set again The sequencer set 0 parameter values in the active set are overwritten Basler ace USB 3 0 241 Features AW00123404000 Use Case Asynchronous cycling through sequencer sets according to path 1 cycling interrupted by asynchronous reset according to path 0 Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge Frame start triggers applied externally via Line 1 Asynchronous trigger source for sequencer set advance Software Signal 3 Asynchronous trigger source for reset of sequencer set advance Software Signal 1 y Software Signal trigger source Software Signal 3 for asynchronous sequencer set advance e delay between sending the advance command and it becoming effectiv
333. tatus the camera can react to frame start trigger signals and will begin to expose a frame each time a proper frame start trigger signal is applied A primary feature of the frame burst start trigger is that after a frame burst start trigger signal has been applied to the camera and the camera has entered the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status the camera will return to the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status once a specified number of frame start triggers has been received Before more frames can be acquired a new frame burst start trigger signal must be applied to the camera to exit it from waiting for frame burst start trigger status Note that this feature only applies when the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to on This feature is explained in greater detail in the following sections 6 3 1 Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode The main parameter associated with the frame burst start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger has two available settings off and on 6 3 1 1 Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame burst start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required frame burst start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame burst start trigger signals to the camera 6 3 1 2 Frame Burst Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode pa
334. tched off If you are using the lookup table feature you must reenter the lookup table values after each camera startup or reset The values for sequencer sets cannot be saved in any user set The current luminance lookup table is not changed when a user set is loaded into the active user set The User Sets with Factory Setups When a camera is manufactured numerous tests are performed on the camera and three factory optimized setups are determined The three user sets with factory optimized setups are The Default User Set with a standard factory setup that is optimized for average conditions and will provide good camera performance in many common applications In the standard factory setup the gain is set to a low value and all auto functions are set to off The High Gain User Set is similar to the Default User Set but the gain is set to 6 dB The Auto Functions User Set is similar to the Default User Set but the Gain Auto and the Exposure Auto auto functions are both enabled and are set to the continuous mode of operation During automatic parameter adjustment gain will be kept to a minimum The user sets with factory setups are saved in permanent files in the camera s non volatile memory They are not lost when the camera is reset or switched off and they can not be changed For more information about auto functions see Section 8 12 on page 261 The User Set Default You can designate one of the six user sets th
335. ted in Figure 89 on page 238 and assumes that the following sequencer related parameter values are set Sequencer Set related Settings Sequencer Sequencer Sequencer Sequencer Set 0 Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Path 0 First sequencer set of path 0 o 0 0 Next sequencer set after current one 0 0 0 0 Trigger source Line 3 GPIO Line 3 GPIO Line 3 GPIO Line 3 GPIO Trigger activation Level High Level High Level High Level High Path 1 First sequencer set of path 0 0 0 0 Next sequencer set after current one 1 2 9Q 0 Trigger source Counter 2 End Counter 2 Counter 2 Counter 2 End End End Counter Duration 1 1 2 1 Trigger activation Level High Level High Level High Level High Table 42 Settings for Sequencer Operation According to Use Case 2 Only one trigger source for a path allowed Applies Always Not Only in this Example Use Case Two in Overview Use case two demonstrates synchronous triggering and cycling through all the available four sequencer sets based on the Counter 2 End trigger source An addition one reset of the cycling occurs Sequencer set triggering according to path 0 is controlled by an external trigger via GPIO line Line 3 configured for input In this use case the cycling through the sequencer sets according to path 1 is based on the Counter 2 End trigger source that in turn is based on Counter 2 and it
336. th the general circumstances used for capturing D A target value for an image property can only be reached if it is in accord with all images Otherwise the target value will only be approached For example with a short exposure time insufficient illumination and a low setting for the upper limit of the gain parameter value the Gain Auto function may not be able to achieve the current target average gray value setting for the image the acA1920 25uc only An auto function uses the binned pixel data and controls You can use an auto function when binning is enabled monochrome cameras and the image property of the binned image For more information about binning see Section 8 7 on page 243 Basler ace USB 3 0 261 Features AW00123404000 8 12 2 Auto Function Operating Modes The following auto function modes of operation are available All auto functions provide the once mode of operation When the once mode of operation is selected the parameter values are automatically adjusted until the related image property reaches the target value After the automatic parameter value adjustment is complete the auto function will automatically be set to off and the new parameter value will be applied to the following images The parameter value can be changed by using the once mode of operation again by using the continuous mode of operation or by manual adjustment will not allow reaching a target val
337. that if you return material without an RMA number we reserve the right to reject the material You can find detailed information about how to obtain an RMA number in the Support section of our website www baslerweb com Basler ace USB 3 0 305 Troubleshooting and Support AW00123404000 9 3 Before Contacting Basler Technical Support To help you as quickly and efficiently as possible when you have a problem with a Basler camera it is important that you collect several pieces of information before you contact Basler technical support Basler technical support contact information is shown in the title section of this manual Three different methods are available of providing data to Basler technical support The methods complement each other We therefore recommend using them all for optimum assistance by automatically generating support information using the Basler pylon USB Configurator A report is generated with information about the USB device tree displayed in the device pane and detailed information about each device by sending an email to Basler technical support already partially prepared by the Basler pylon USB Configurator by using the form given below To automatically generate support information 1 Click the question mark in the menu bar of the Basler pylon USB Configurator 2 Click Generate Support Information in the dropdown menu The Support Information window opens displaying a report 3 Click the Copy
338. the end of readout for line N the last line You can read the Readout Time parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to get the parameter value doubl d camera SensorReadoutTime GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily get the parameter value For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 146 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Guideline for Overlapped Acquisition Image Acquisition Control an important guideline you must keep in mind If you are operating the camera in such a way that frame acquisitions will be overlapped there is Signal ExFSTrig l on Loo o gt 400 ys Min Frame Acquisition N Frame Acquisition N 1 Frame Acquisition N 2 Time Fig 67 Acquisition Overlap Guideline E3 Line Exposure You must wait a minimum of 400 us after the end of exposure for line one in frame N before you can trigger acquisition of frame N 1 This requirement is illustrated in Figure 67 Frame Start Overtrigger event If this guideline is violated the camera will ignore the frame start trigger signal and will declare a I Line Readout when exposure can safely begin You can avoid violating this guideline by using the camera s Frame Trigger Wait signal to determine Basler ace USB 3 0 147 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404
339. therefore the assignment is always identical for both auto functions For example if you assign the brightness auto function to Auto Function ROI 2 the Gain Auto and the Exposure Auto auto functions should both assigned to Auto Function ROI 2 This does not imply however that the Gain Auto and the Exposure Auto auto functions must always be used at the same time You can assign auto functions to Auto Function ROIs from within your application software by using the pylon API As an example the following code snippet illustrates using the API to assign the Gain Auto and Exposure Auto auto function considered as a single brightness auto function and the Exposure Auto auto function to Auto Function ROI 1 The snippet also illustrates disabling the unused Auto Function ROI 2 to avoid assigning any auto function to more than one Auto Function ROI Select Auto Function ROI 1 Assign auto functions to the selected Auto Function ROI camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 camera AutoFunctionAOIUseBrightness SetValue true camera AutoFunctionAOIUseWhiteBalance SetValue true Select the unused Auto Function ROI 2 Disable the unused Auto Function ROI camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI2 camera AutoFunctionAOIUseBrightness SetValue false camera AutoFunctionAOIUseWhiteBalance SetValue false You can also use the Basler pylo
340. tic ROI centering camera CenterX SetValu true camera CenterY SetValue true 8 5 2 Changing ROI Parameters On the Fly Making ROI parameter changes on the fly means making the parameter changes while the camera is capturing images continuously On the fly changes are only allowed for the parameters that determine the position of the ROI i e the Offset X and Offset Y parameters Changes to the ROI size are not allowed on the fly Basler ace USB 3 0 213 Features AW00123404000 8 6 Sequencer available For more information about the auto functions feature see Section 8 12 D When the auto functions feature is enabled the sequencer feature will not be on page 261 The sequencer feature is not available for the acA1920 155 camera 8 6 1 Introduction The sequencer feature allows you to apply different sets of configuration parameter settings called sequencer sets to a sequence of image acquisitions As the images are acquired one sequencer set after the other is applied This makes it possible to quickly respond to changing imaging requirements while acquiring images For example imaging requirements will change when the illumination changes After camera startup or reset the sequencer sets will be available with default parameter values according to the settings of the default user set Each sequencer set is identified by an index number that can range from zero t
341. tical Decimation If vertical binning is used vertical decimation is automatically disabled and vice versa i e if vertical decimation is used vertical binning is disabled Horizontal binning works independently from the decimation feature 250 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Vertical Decimation s Effect on ROI Settings If vertical decimation is activated the camera E automatically adapts the ROI settings to the modified image size based on the formulas below For evaluating the new ROI height the camera takes into account the number of physical lines that are LLL between the first transmitted line L1 and the last transmitted line Ln i e the so called covered lines TE see Figure 99 The line Ln 1 in our example would not be part of the covered lines when the decimation feature is activated Calculating the covered lines C For mono cameras C H_old x D old D old 1 For color cameras Fig 99 Covered Lines Mono Camera C H old x D old 2x D old 2 As soon as the covered lines are determined the camera C Coverage calculates the new ROI height D new New decimation value D old Old decimation value For mono cameras H new New ROI height New ROI height Round up C D new H old Old ROI height For color cameras New ROI height 2 x Round up C 2 D new parameter back to 1 i e you deactivate vertic
342. ting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 32 L S Shifted Three Times P lt Shift by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the output from the camera will include bit 7 through bit 0 from the AD ADC S bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting four times is that the output of 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 the camera is effectively multiplied by 16 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 4 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the multiply by 4 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 16 204 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 4 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift There are several checks and precautions that you must follow before using the digital shift feature The checks and precautions differ depending on whether the camera will be set for a 12 bit pixel format or for an 8 bit pixel format in your application If you will be using a 12 bit pixel format make this check Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 12 bit pixel format and no digital shift Check the output of the camera under your normal lighti
343. tion 6 1 on page 97 and Section 6 2 on page 101 For more information about the frame burst start trigger and about the acquisition status see Section 6 1 on page 97 and Section 6 3 on page 103 Referring to the use case diagrams that appear in Section 6 9 on page 162 can help you understand the explanations of the frame start trigger Basler ace USB 3 0 111 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 6 4 4 Frame Start Trigger Mode The main parameter associated with the frame start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger has two available settings off and on 6 4 1 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Off When the Frame Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to off the camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera With the trigger mode set to off the way that the camera will operate the frame start trigger depends on the setting of the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame the camera will automatically generate a single frame start trigger signal whenever it receives an Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame the camera will automatically begin generating frame start trigger signals when it receives an Acquisition Start command The camera will continue to generate frame start trigger si
344. tive Response 0 0 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wavelength nm Fig 15 acA1300 30uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Relative Response ane 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wavelength nm Fig 16 acA1600 20uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 22 AW00123404000 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Quantum Efficiency 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 Wavelength nm Fig 17 acA1920 25uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Relative Response 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wavelength nm Fig 18 acA1920 155uc From Sensor Data Sheet Basler ace USB 3 0 23 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 Quantum Efficiency e w AR AB a Cc co N N oo e ce gt gt e c e ai e Q Q c e Cc e Cc e Cc e e Wavelength nm Fig 19 acA2000 165uc acA2040 90uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet Quantum Efficiency 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 Wavelength nm Fig 20 acA2500 14uc Spectral Response From Sensor Data Sheet 24 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specification
345. to Clipboard button to keep the support information for inclusion in an email to Basler technical support To use a prepared email 1 Click the question mark in the menu bar of the Basler pylon USB Configurator 2 Click Contact Basler Support in the dropdown menu A pylon Support Request window for an email to Basler technical support opens It includes in formation about the currently used versions of pylon and the PC s operating system 3 Include the previously generated support information see above 4 f you are outside Europe replace support europe baslerweb com by the address of your local Basler technical support To use the form 1 Copy the form that appears below fill it out and send it with sample images if appropriate with your email to Basler technical support or fax the completed form with the requested files attached to your local dealer or to Basler tech nical support 306 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Troubleshooting and Support 1 The camera s product ID 2 The camera s serial number 3 Host adapter and chipset that you use with the camera Do you use a hub r Yes No 4 Describe the problem in as much detail as possible If you need more space use an extra sheet of paper 5 fknown whats the cause of the problem 6 When did the problem occur After start While running After a certain action e g a change of parameter
346. to functions Image ROI or depending on your needs choosing identical positions and sizes We strongly recommend completely including the Auto Function ROI within the for Auto Function ROI and Image ROI about the behavior and roles of Auto Function ROI and Image ROI when also D You can use auto functions when also using the reverse X feature For information using the reverse X feature see the Reverse X section Basler ace USB 3 0 265 Features AW00123404000 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Auto Function ROI E JEENENENEEN E n SOOO __ Image ROI PPP fa 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 9 01234525678 4 25 26 27 28 29 30 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NN Auto Function ROI Image ROI i g 01234567 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
347. trol AW00123404000 Guideline for Overlapped Operation with Trigger Width Exposure If the camera is set for the trigger width exposure mode and you are operating the camera in a way that readout and exposure will be overlapped there is an important guideline you must keep in mind You must not end the exposure time of the current frame acquisition until readout of the previously acquired frame is complete If this guideline is violated the camera will drop the frame for which the exposure was just ended and will declare a Frame Start Overtrigger event This situation is illustrated in Figure 64 with the camera set for the trigger width exposure mode with rising edge triggering ExFSTrig Signal Frame Acquisition N Exposure Sensor Readout Frame Acquisition N 1 Ex r posure aia This exposure was ended too early The frame will be dropped and an overtrigger event declared Exp Frame Acquisition N 3 Exposure Sensor Readout E A Time Fig 64 Overtriggering Caused by an Early End of Exposure You can avoid violating this guideline by using the camera s Frame Trigger Wait signal to determine when exposure can safely begin and by properly setting the camera s Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter For more information about the Frame Trigger Wait signal and the Exposure Overlap Time Max parameter see Section 6 8 4 on page 153 For more infor
348. trongly recommended The camera supplies a flash window output signal to facilitate the use of flash lighting 134 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control for the first row elapses before exposure for the last row of the current ROI has D In ERS mode the flash window signal will not be available when the exposure time started i e when Exposure Time Reset Runtime For more information about the exposure active output signal see Section 6 8 1 on page 148 For more information about the Exposure Time parameter see Section 6 5 on page 127 For more information about the flash window see Section 6 6 2 1 on page 138 Global Reset Release Mode The global reset release mode is a variant of the electronic rolling shutter mode When the shutter is operating in global reset release mode all of the lines in the sensor reset and begin exposing when frame start is triggered However in the end of exposure there is a temporal offset designated as tRow from one line to the next The tRow values are the same as in electronic rolling shutter mode see Table 25 on page 132 The pixel values for each line are read out at the end of exposure time for the line The readout time for each line is also equal to tRow The exposure time for line one is determined by the Exposure Time parameter setting The exposure for line two will end tRow after the exposure ends for line one The exposure for line three will
349. trostatic charging Transport properly Transport the camera in its original packaging only Do not discard the packaging Clean properly Note Before starting the cleaning procedure cut off all power to the camera by unplugging the plugs from the USB 3 0 Micro B port and from the 6 pin I O connector Make sure all window cleaner or detergent has vaporized after the cleaning procedure before reconnecting the plugs Avoid cleaning the surface of the camera s sensor if possible If you must clean it use a soft lint free cloth dampened with a small quantity of high quality window cleaner Because electrostatic discharge can damage the sensor you must use a cloth that will not generate static during cleaning cotton is a good choice To clean the surface of the camera housing use a soft dry cloth To remove severe stains use a soft cloth dampened with a small quantity of neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the housing they can damage the surface finish Read the manual Read the manual carefully before using the camera Basler ace USB 3 0 39 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 40 Basler ace USB 3 0 2 Installation The information you will need to do a quick simple installation of the camera and related software is included in the Quick Installation Guide for ace USB 3 0 Cameras AW001235 The document also includes information about suitable USB 3 0 hos
350. u want to preserve the aspect ratios of imaged objects when using binning you must use vertical and horizontal binning where equal numbers of lines and columns are binned e g vertical binning by 3 combined with horizontal binning by 3 Binning s Effect on ROI Settings When you have the camera set to use binning keep in mind that the settings for your region of interest ROI will refer to the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the sensor as they normally would Another way to think of this is by using the concept of a virtual sensor For example assume that you are using an acA640 90um camera set for 3 by 3 binning as described above In this case you would act as if you were actually working with a 219 column by 164 line sensor when setting your ROI parameters The maximum ROI width would be 219 and the maximum ROI height would be 164 When you set the X Offset and the Width for the ROI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor columns And when you set the Y Offset and the Height for the ROI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor lines For more information about the region of interest ROI feature see Section 8 5 on page 207 Binning s Effect on Decimation If vertical binning is used vertical decimation see below is automatically disabled and vice versa i e if vertical decimation is used vertical binning is disabled Horizontal binning works indep
351. uc 0 0 63 9375 1023 acA4600 10uc 0 0 63 9375 1023 Table 35 Minimum and Maximum Black Level Settings DN 198 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features To set the Black Level parameter value using Basler pylon 1 Set the Black Level Selector to All 2 Setthe Black Level parameter to your desired value You can set the Black Level Selector and the Black Level parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value camera BlackLevelSelector SetValue BlackLevelSelector A11 camera BlackLevel SetValue 1 0 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler ace USB 3 0 199 Features AW00123404000 8 3 Remove Parameter Limits For each camera feature the allowed range of any associated parameter values is normally limited The factory limits are designed to ensure optimum camera operation and in particular good image quality For special camera uses however it may be helpful to set parameter values outside of the factory limits The remove parameter limits feature lets you remove the factory limits for parameters associated with certain camera features When the factory limits are removed the parameter values can be set within extended
352. ue for an image property the auto function will try to reach the target value for a maximum of 30 images and will then be set to off D If an auto function is setto the once operation mode and if the circumstances Some auto functions also provide a continuous mode of operation where the parameter value is adjusted repeatedly while images are acquired Depending on the current frame rate the automatic adjustments will usually be carried out for every or every other image The repeated automatic adjustment will proceed until the once mode of operation is used or until the auto function is set to off in which case the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic adjustment will operate unless the parameter is manually adjusted When an auto function is set to off the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic adjustment will operate unless the parameter is manually adjusted You can enable auto functions and change their settings while the camera is capturing images on the fly the camera was continuously capturing images the auto function will become effective with a short delay and the first few images may not be affected by the auto function D If you have set an auto function to once or continuous operation mode while 262 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 12 3 Auto Function ROIs Each auto function uses the pixel data from an Auto Function ROI
353. ue must always be set to 0 This selects sequencer set 0 as the first set to be loaded and used for an image acquisition The Sequencer Set Selector parameter selects a sequencer set by its index number Selecting a sequencer set is necessary when configuring a sequencer set see Section 8 6 3 on page 222 or when loading a sequencer set into the active set see Section 8 6 3 3 on page 225 The Sequencer Set Path parameter selects a path by its index number Two different paths are available path 0 and path 1 Each path allows to configure a distinct scheme for advancing from one sequencer set to the next We strongly encourage setting different sequencer trigger sources for path 0 and path 1 Path 0 and path 1 serve different purposes and should be configured accordingly Path 1 provides the scheme that allows to cycle through the available sequencer sets This is the mechanism for the standard use of the sequencer feature Path 0 allows to return to sequencer set 0 at any time and therefore provides a way for resetting the cycling through the sequencer sets that is carried out according to path 1 Basler ace USB 3 0 217 Features AW00123404000 For each path the following parameters must be set see also Figure 86 SequencerSetNext Selects the sequencer set to be loaded next into the active set after the present one when a trigger occurs for the related trigger source see next entry The next sequencer set will r
354. uencer set 3 was loaded because the Counter 2 count for sequencer set 2 was found to have reached its maximum allowed value in the preceding frame acquisition The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 3 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is found to be 1 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 3 has already reached its maximum and must start again with the next frame acquisition When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 0 is loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitted out of the camera Sequencer set 0 was loaded because the Counter 2 count for sequencer set 1 was found to already have reached its maximum allowed value in the preceding frame acquisition With the use of sequencer set 0 a new cycle of sequencer sets has begun The current frame start trigger count of Counter 2 is found to be 1 The Counter Duration setting applicable to sequencer set 0 and defining the maximum Counter 2 count is found to be 1 Accordingly the Counter 2 count related to sequencer set 0 has already reached its maximum and can therefore must start again with the next frame acquisition When the next frame start trigger signal was received sequencer set 1 is loaded into the active set and is used for the image acquisition The image data are processed and transmitte
355. upplied via the camera s USB 3 0 port 2 8 W max 5 VDC I O Lines 1 opto isolated input line 1 opto isolated output line and 2 direct coupled GPIO lines power supplies must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Lens Mount C mount CS mount Size Lx W x H 29 3 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm without cylindric housing extension or connectors 48 2 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm with cylindric housing extension and connectors Weight 80g Conformity CE UL FCC GenlCam V 2 x including PFNC V 1 x and SFNC V 2 x IP30 RoHS USB3 Vision USB IF in preparation The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 2 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification acA1300 30um uc acA1600 20um uc at full resolution Sensor Size um 1296 x 966 um 1626 x 1236 H x V pixels uc 1294 x 964 uc 1624 x 1234 Sensor Type Sony ICX445 AL AQ Sony ICX274 AL AQ Progressive scan CCD Progressive scan CCD Global shutter Global shutter Optical Size 1 3 1 1 8 Effective Sensor Diagonal 6 1 mm 9 0 mm Pixel Size H x V 3 75 um x 3 75um 4 4 um x 4 4 um Max Frame Rate 31 fps 20 fps
356. ur sequencer sets are to be used the Sequencer Set Next parameter value for path 1 used with the fourth sequencer set index number 3 must be set to 0 This ensures that each sequencer set cycle according to path 1 resumes with sequencer set 0 222 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 6 3 2 Carrying Out Configuration Before configuring sequencer sets Make sure the sequencer mode is set to Off and the sequencer configuration mode is set to On Otherwise the parameter values of the current sequencer set cannot be read or changed using the pylon API or the pylon Viewer Only those sequencer set parameter values will be displayed that were active before the sequencer mode was set to On You will not be able to see the new parameter values set for the current sequencer set We recommend that you do not attempt to read or change any of the sequencer parameters when the sequencer mode is set to On set see Section 8 6 2 on page 215 In these cases the previous parameter It may occur that you will not configure all parameter values used with a sequencer values will persist in the active set Carry out the following routine for each sequencer set you want to configure To configure and store a sequencer set Make sure the value of the Sequencer Mode is set to Off Make sure the value of the Sequencer Configuration Mode is set to On To configure the desired sequencer set select its
357. urce Path 0 Counter 2 End n i i H a i P Trigger Source 7777 earns iic sS VOS esta E iiic ES TERED UTE ae ag E ee eS cigs Pathi Vw v v v v v v v v v v El LO L1 H EH O E 2 m 1 P CZA UA a UA UZZ UA ZA zza Frame Start Trigger Signal m E EEE E E E E EEE ON Time Fig 89 Use Case 2 Synchronous Cycling Through Sequencer Sets Based on Counter 2 End Path 1 One Reset 238 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Use Case 3 Sequencer Set Advance based on a Software Signal One Reset Use case three is illustrated in Figure 90 on page 242 and assumes that the following sequencer related parameter values are set Sequencer Set related Settings Sequencer Sequencer Sequencer Sequencer Set 0 Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Path 0 First sequencer set of path 0 o 0 0 Next sequencer set after current one 0 0 0 0 Trigger source Software Software Software Software Signal 1 Signal 1 Signal 1 Signal 1 Trigger activation Level High Level High Level High Level High Path 1 First sequencer set of path 0 0 0 0 Next sequencer set after current one 1 2 3 0 Trigger source Software Software Software Software Signal 3 Signal 3 Signal 3 Signal 3 Trigger activation Level High Level High Level High Level High Table 43 Settings for Sequencer Operation According to Use Case 3 Only one trigger source for a path allowe
358. ure allows you to increase the signal width pulse width to a minimum width If the signal width of the original output signal is narrower than the set minimum the Line Minimum Output Pulse Width feature will increase the signal width to the set minimum before the signal is sent out of the camera see the figure below If the signal width of the original output signal is equal to or wider than the set minimum the Line Minimum Output Pulse Width feature will have no effect The signal will be sent out of the camera with unmodified signal width Without signal With signal width increase width increase Output signal eee eee lt 4 l l Minimum output width max 100 us Not to Scale Fig 44 Increasing the Signal Width of an Output Signal 82 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface Setting the Line Minimum Output Pulse Width The minimum output pulse width is determined by the value of the LineMinimumOutputPulseWidth parameter The parameter can be set in a range from 0 to 100 us To set the line minimum output pulse width parameter value using Basler pylon 1 Use the Line Selector to select a camera output line for example Line 2 2 Set the value of the LineMinimumOutputPulseWidth parameter You can set the Line Selector and the value of the LineMinimumOutputPulseWidth parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to se
359. ure time chunk is enabled and Chunk Mode Active is enabled the camera will append an exposure time stamp chunk to each acquired image After an image with an appended chunk has been received by your PC the chunk must be retrieved For information about retrieving data chunks see Section 8 18 4 on page 303 You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon Camera Software Suite The following code snippet illustrates using the API to activate the chunk mode select the exposure time chunk and enable the exposure time chunk make chunk mode active select and enable Exposure Time chunk camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector_ExposureTime camera ChunkEnable SetValue true You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Camera Software Suite and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 298 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features 8 18 3 4 Timestamp Chunk The timestamp chunk feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a timestamp that was generated when frame acquisition was triggered The timestamp is a 64 bit value The timestamp is based on a counter that counts the number of timestamp clock ticks generated by the camera The unit for each tick is 1 ns as specified by the Gev Timestamp Tick Frequency The counter starts at camera power
360. user must apply a frame burst start trigger signal to the camera In this case we have set the frame burst start trigger signal source to software so the execution of a frame burst trigger software command will serve as the frame burst start trigger signal The Acquisition Burst Frame Count parameter is set to 3 When a frame burst trigger software command is executed the camera will exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has acquired 3 frames it will re enter the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status Before any more frames can be acquired a new frame burst trigger software command must be executed to make the camera exit the waiting for frame burst start trigger acquisition status Because the frame start trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera in order to begin each frame acquisition In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line Line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line Line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal Keep in mind that the camera will only react to a frame start trigger signal when it is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status A possible use for this type of setup is a conveyor system that moves objects past an ins
361. ut Line2 Note however that you can also configure the The examples in this section mainly refer to I O lines that are dedicated for either GPIO lines Line 3 Line 4 for input or output 6 1 Overview This section presents an overview of the elements available for controlling the acquisition of images Reading this section will give you an idea about how these elements fit together and will help you understand the detailed information in the sections below Four major elements are involved in controlling the acquisition of images Acquisition start and acquisition stop commands and the acquisition mode parameter Frame burst start trigger Frame start trigger Exposure time control Keep in mind that frame is typically used to mean a single acquired image When reading the material in this chapter also refer to Figure 49 on page 99 and to the use case diagrams in Section 6 9 on page 162 These diagrams illustrate the roles of the acquisition start and stop commands the acquisition mode the frame burst start trigger and the frame start trigger Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode The Acquisition Start command prepares the camera to acquire frames The camera cannot acquire frames unless an Acquisition Start command has first been executed A parameter called the Acquisition Mode has a direct bearing on how the Acquisition Start command operates If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to si
362. ut Type USB 3 0 nominal max 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed Pixel Formats Mono Model Mono 8 Mono 12p Mono 12 Color Model Mono 8 Bayer GB 12p Bayer GB 8 YCbCr422 8 Bayer GB 12 ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal via the USB 3 0 port or free run Exposure Control Via external trigger signal or programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements Nominal 5 VDC SELV and LPS compliant and in accord with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification supplied via the camera s USB 3 0 port 2 2 W typical and max 5 VDC I O Lines 1 opto isolated input line 1 opto isolated output line and 2 direct coupled GPIO lines power supplies must meet the SELV and LPS requirements Lens Mount C mount CS mount Size L x W x H 29 3 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm without cylindric housing extension or connectors 48 2 mm x 29 mm x 29 mm with cylindric housing extension and connectors Weight lt 80g Conformity CE UL FCC GenlCam V 2 x including PFNC V 1 x and SFNC V 2 x IP30 RoHS USB3 Vision USB IF in preparation Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 7 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 11 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00123404000 Specification acA3800 14um uc
363. ut line Line 2 2 Setthe value of the User Output Value parameter to true 1 or false 0 This will set the status of the output line You can set the Output Selector and the User Output Value parameters from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to designate an output line as user settable set the status of the output line and get informed about its current status Set output line Line 2 to user settable camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Line2 camera LineSource SetValue LineSource UserOutputl1 Set the status of output line Line 2 camera UserOutputSelector SetValue UserOutputSelector UserOutputl1 camera UserOutputValue SetValue true Get informed about the current user output value setting for output line Line 2 bool b camera UserOutputValue GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters as user settable the user setting initially sets the status of the line which is then D If you have the line inverter enabled on an output line and the line is designated inverted by the line inverter For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 84 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 12 4 Setting and Checking the Status of All User Settable Output Lines You can set and check the curr
364. utions AW00123404000 Specification acA1300 30um uc acA1600 20um uc Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 3 General Specifications Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification acA1920 25um uc at full resolution Sensor Size um 1920 x 1080 H x V pixels uc 1920 x 1080 Sensor Type Aptina MT9P031 Progressive scan CMOS Rolling shutter Optical Size 1 3 7 Effective Sensor Diagonal 4 9 mm Pixel Size H x V 2 2 um x 2 2 um Max Frame Rate 26 fps Mono Color Mono or color color cameras include a Bayer pattern RGB filter on the sensor Data Output Type USB 3 0 nominal max 5 Gbit s SuperSpeed Pixel Formats Mono Models Mono 8 Mono 12p Mono 12 Color Models Mono 8 Bayer GB 12p Bayer GB 8 YCbCr422 8 Bayer GB 12 ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal via the USB 3 0 port or free run Exposure Control Via external trigger signal or programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements Nominal 5 VDC SELV and LPS compliant and in accord with the Universal Serial Bus 3 0 specification supplied via the camera s USB 3 0 port 2 2 W typical and max 5 VDC I O Lines 1 opto isolated i
365. uts Fast Edge Slow Edge Opto isolated output 3 6us falling edge 27 38 us rising edge Direct coupled GPIO OUT lt 0 5 us falling edge 2 5 us rising edge Table 17 Propagation Delays for the Camera Outputs 25 C R1 1700 Ug 5 VDC Transition Threshold 2 0 V For the graphical illustration of propagation delays see Figure 41 and Figure 42 74 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Physical Interface 5 10 4 Recommendations for Using Camera I Os Adhering to the following recommendations will help you to achieve efficient and stable camera operation when using the camera s I O lines When reading the recommendations also see Figure 41 and Figure 42 Opto isolated I Os and Direct coupled GPIOs Use the fast edge of a signal for tight temporal control and to minimize unwanted influence on propagation delays in general The propagation delays for a fast edge will rarely exceed 15 us for an opto isolated I O line and rarely 1 us for a direct coupled GPIO line Under very unfavorable conditions propagation delays related to slow edges can take milliseconds To minimize propagation delays related to a fast edge increase the load resistance To minimize propagation delays related to a slow edge use an I O supply voltage between 3 3 VDC and 5 VDC and decrease the load resistance such that a load current between 30 mA and 40 mA will result Use the direct coupled GPIO lines when you ne
366. value Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the exposure active output signal software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set Camera i LineSelector SetValu camera LineSourc SetValu LineSelector Line2 LineSourc ExposureActive Basler ace USB 3 0 149 Image Acquisition Control AW00123404000 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about changing the selection of a camera output signal as the source signal for an output line see Section 5 12 1 on page 80 For more information about the electrical characteristics of output line Line 2 see Section 5 8 1 on page 60 and of GPIO Line 3 and Line 4 set for output see Section 5 9 3 1 on page 67 6 8 2 Flash Window Signal Cameras with a rolling shutter imaging sensor acA1920 25 acA2500 14 acA3800 14 Flash Window Sana Flash Window splash Window 71 rM E ire m S 4 _ oS E r acA4600 10 models can provide a flash window output signal to aid you in the use of flash lighting The flash window signal will go high when the flash window for each image acquisition opens and will go low when the flash window closes Figure 70 illustrates the flash window signal on a camera with the shutter operating in th
367. will acquire frames at the maximum allowed frame rate Cameras are used in free run for many applications One example is for aerial photography A camera set for free run is used to capture a continuous series of images as an aircraft overflies an area The images can then be used for a variety of purposes including vegetation coverage estimates archaeological site identification etc For more information about the Acquisition Frame Rate parameter see Section 6 3 1 1 on page 103 168 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case Free Run Frame Burst Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger Off The frame burst start trigger is off The camera will generate frame burst start trigger signals internally with no action by the user The frame start trigger is off The camera will generate frame start trigger signals internally with no action by the user Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the frame burst start trigger Off Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger Off Settings a trigger signal generated by the camera internally Ese camera is waiting for a frame burst start trigger 7 Camera is waiting for a frame start trigger frame exposure and readout frame transmission qe Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed ri ri ri ri ri ri ri Frame Burst Start VW Li it VW Li i rt Trigger Signal N Coa Oo Sid ee oe i et ee
368. xel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 8th gray value for example 8 16 24 32 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 3 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 3 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 512 202 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Features Shift by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the output from the camera will include bit 7 ADC through bit 0 from the ADC along with 4 Ce en Pn ay Pe zeros as LSBs ce a a E The result of shifting 4 times is that the output of the camera is effectively M S S multiplied by 16 io Shifted Four Times When the camera is set to shift by 4 the 4 least significant bits output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 16th gray value for example 16 32 48 64 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 4 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 4 setting when your pixel rea
369. xels in the imaging sensor Once exposure is complete the second part of the process readout of the pixel values from the sensor takes place In regard to this frame acquisition process there are two common ways for the camera to operate with non overlapped exposure and with overlapped exposure In the non overlapped mode of operation each time a frame is acquired the camera completes the entire exposure sensor readout process before acquisition of the next frame is started The exposure for a new frame does not overlap the sensor readout for the previous frame This situation is illustrated in Figure 62 with the camera set for the trigger width exposure mode ExFSTrig Signal Frame Acquisition N Frame Acquisition N 1 Frame Acquisition N 2 Exposure Sensor Readout Exposure Sensor Readout Exposure Sensor Readout gt Time Fig 62 Non overlapped Exposure and Sensor Readout In the overlapped mode of operation the exposure of a new frame begins while the camera is still reading out the sensor data for the previously acquired frame This situation is illustrated in Figure 63 with the camera set for the trigger width exposure mode 142 Basler ace USB 3 0 AW00123404000 Image Acquisition Control Signal Frame Acquisition N Exposure Sensor Readout Frame Acquisition N 1 Exposure Sensor Readout Frame Acquisition N 2 Exposure Sensor Readout Fram
370. y external triggers This allows tight synchronization between triggers for sequencer set advance and frame start triggers The trigger assigned to path 1 goes low between most frame start triggers and if desired goes high well ahead before the frame start triggers rise This ensures that the trigger signals assigned to path 1 have reached the desired signal levels in time before they will be evaluated by the frame start trigger with respect to sequencer set advance Another aspect of sequencer set advance becomes apparent The signal levels of the external triggers assigned to path 1 and path 0 will matter for sequencer set advance only at the moment when they are evaluated by the frame start trigger not shown for path 0 in this use case The moment occurs when the frame start trigger signal rises assuming the frame start trigger signal is set for rising edge triggering The signal levels of the external triggers assigned to path 1 and path 0 that occur between frame start triggers have no effect on sequencer set advance Use Case One in Detail Assuming that the sequencer sets are configured according to Table 41 on page 229 and the camera is not acquiring images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the Sequencer Mode parameter value is set to On the sequencer feature becomes enabled for the application of sequencer sets during image acquisitions The transitional dummy sequencer set with index number 1 is loaded into the active

Basler ace USB 3.0 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents